Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

and View. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. and click. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Edit. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . notice a door type is specified. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. While working in the drawing area.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. click Toolbar. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. On the left side of the Options Bar. To choose commands. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Then. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. click the command name to start the command. TIP For example. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. place the cursor over the menu name. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

You use the Type Selector in two ways. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. For example. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. First. notice the list of walls that are available. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. if you intend to add a door. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. 9 In the Type Selector. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. If you select the Door tool. Within the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. 11 Click OK. immediately below the Type Selector.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.

TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . and rename views. schedules. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. select Views (all). walls. sheets. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. windows). elevations. reports. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. click the tab. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. families. family category (doors. 3D). delete. In the Project Browser. and groups.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. families. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. and group name. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add.

Do not click. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. The browser is dockable. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. double-click the name. click Wall. After you create a browser organization scheme. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.■ ■ To open a view. click Cancel. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. It highlights when the cursor is over it. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. regarding selected components within a view. In this case. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. in conjunction with Tooltips. click Modify. When you place the cursor over a component. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . The Status Bar also provides information. 18 On the Design Bar. In the Status Bar. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows.In the bottom left corner of the window. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help. 20 Press TAB. The elevation symbol consists of two parts." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view.

and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Click the Help button. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Windows: From any window. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. You can also press SHIFT+F1. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click . There are several tools that help you find information. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. For example. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. You can use this tri-pane. press F1 to get help on that dialog box.rvt. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. If there is no Help button displayed. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. find a keyword on the Index tab. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. click Training Files. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.

5 Click Zoom Out (2x). 7 Click Zoom To Fit. 8 Click in the drawing area. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 . The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. this is referred to as a crossing selection. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. 6 On the View toolbar. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu.

called drag controls. On a wheel mouse. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. click Zoom. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Similar controls. and drag the cursor. roll the wheel to zoom the view. expand Floor Plans. Without clicking in the dialog. 14 Enter ZR. click . To modify or add snap increments. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. expand Views (all). click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. Small blue dots. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. When drawing or modifying a building model. and double-click 2nd Flr. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . These are the drag controls. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. Cnst. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. press and hold CTRL. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. on the View toolbar.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. referred to as shape handles. and select the wall. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. display along the ends. bottoms. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically.

18 Select the Craftsman02 table. In this case. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. require two clicks to complete the command. and click again to specify the ending position. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. for example. click (Move). click to specify the starting position. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. and on the Edit toolbar.15 Click and drag the left control. such as Move and Copy. Some commands. After selecting the element to be moved. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 . you want to move the table closer to the wall. to lengthen the wall.

The table and plant are returned to their original locations. In this example. Select the plant. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and drag it on top of the table. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. click the drop-down menu next to . All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 23 On the Undo menu. Move.20 Click next to the lower wall. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. select the second item in the list. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. as shown. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar.

25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. click Modify. on the Standard toolbar. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. Press ESC twice. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . On the Design Bar. Some commands. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Undo command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. such as the Lines command.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click Lines. 26 To end the command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 27 Close the file without saving your changes.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid. a curtain wall. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. As you develop the building design. it is good practice to test the constraints. For example. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. 25 . You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. the wall or column will move with it. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. If the grid moves. a central service core.

you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. In practice. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. you load any required family type that is not in your project. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. from the product library.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. After the beginning exercises. such as a door or window. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building.

duplicate them. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North.rte. These views are customizable: you can rename them. but contains no geometry. The new project opens. Ceiling Plans. with an RVT extension. under Create new. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. Creating the Project | 27 . you design inside the elevation markers. West. NOTE If you create a project without a template. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. In views that display elevation markers. and residential. you use a template that is provided with the software. views. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. construction. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. 5 Click OK. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. schedules. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Project. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. expand Floor Plans. notice four elevation markers.Creating the Project In this exercise. To create the project file. you will use the default template. 7 If necessary. In the drawing space in the right pane. expand Views (all). you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. locate the Project Browser. reflected ceiling plan views. sheets. For this project. and elevation views created in the project by the template. and families in your project. East. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. and settings. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. and click Browse. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. South. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. verify the second option is selected. and customize the project as necessary. and Elevations (Building Elevation). Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. change their properties. click Training Files. 3 Under Template file. The project is stored as a single file. and delete them. levels.

view the Save Reminder interval. Families. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. verify Project Files (*. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. and duplicate levels. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. 15 For Save as type. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). created by the template. the view you see in the drawing area. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. and click Training Files. enter Revit Retail Building. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . will be accessible from the Project Browser. heights. Groups. delete. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. Two level lines. as well as change their names.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. double-click South. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. 16 Click Save. As you design and document your building model. verify that Level 1 displays as bold.rvt) is selected. content and building model reports. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. 13 In the file window. notice the Legends. and other properties. you will want to save your work frequently. and on the General tab. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. Schedules/Quantities. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. Sheets (all). After you modify the two default levels. double-click Metric. You change the names of the 2 default levels. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.8 Under Floor Plans. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). 10 In the Project Browser. such as schedules and legends. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. You can add. 14 For File name. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. display in the south elevation.

enter 00 Foundation. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. the other levels move and change with it. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. enter -1800 mm. and press ENTER.You learn how the levels are locked. and press ENTER. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. and double-click South. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. so that when one level moves. or constrained. 5 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. and windows within the building model. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. and press ENTER. expand Views (all). 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. When you begin designing. to each other. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. doors. enter 01 Entry Level. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. enter 0 mm. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. Adding Project Levels | 29 . under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans.

3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. enter 3750 mm. you add another level. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. right-click Level 3. When you add the new level. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. and move it slightly upward. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. 13 On the Options Bar. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 14 Click Plan View Types. verify and Make Plan View are selected. click Level. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. 23 On the Options Bar. not all the tabs are visible. using a different option. As you move the cursor. 16 Enter 3750 mm. which should display by default. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. By default. and enter 02 Level. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. and click OK. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 21 In the Project Browser. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. click Rename. and click Basics. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 19 Click OK. verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. Next. A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. and then move it up. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 18 In the Project Browser. If it does not. and for Offset. right-click. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. click . a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. under Floor Plans. view the Design Bar. click Level. and press ESC. This is the Options Bar.Next.

add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Adding Project Levels | 31 . 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. 27 Press ESC. or on the Design Bar. Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. 26 Rename the level 03 Level. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. If you create a level by copying it. as shown. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. click Modify to end the command. and rename the corresponding views.25 Click to place the level line.

you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. the levels are no longer constrained. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. 3 On the Options Bar. select . ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you select a level and click its lock. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. click Modify. click Grid. “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. specify a start point for the grid line. all the levels move. so that if the roof elevation changes. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. and you can move them independently. In the following exercise. Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser.Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. the column height changes as well. On the Design Bar. By using the grid to control placement of columns. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. Notice that by moving the top level. Move the cursor up. under Floor Plans. When the grid is complete. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. and specify the grid line endpoint. In a later exercise.

and click to place the line. Click to place the grid line. Next. and click to place the line. for Offset. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Creating a Column Grid | 33 . for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. enter 4500 mm. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. Enter A. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. enter 7500 mm. On the Options Bar. click . 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and for Offset. and click to place the line. enter 7500 mm. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and press ENTER. On the Options Bar. click Grid. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D.

specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click Grid. The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Dimension.8 Press ESC. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click and specify an Offset of 0 mm. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. and specify the grid line endpoint. ■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. click Grid. as shown. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. On the Options Bar.

14 On the Options Bar. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. click and drag the blue circular grip up. select grid lines C and 3. click Modify. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 22 While pressing CTRL. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. Two pins display on the grid lines. until it is closer to grid line A. and press ESC. By pinning these central grid lines. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. until it is closer to grid line 5. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 15 Starting with grid line A. 24 Press ESC. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. At the left endpoint of the grid line. click Dimension. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 21 Press ESC. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. The pins are hidden. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . and select grid line A. 18 On the Design Bar. click . The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. and press ESC.

■ If necessary. 32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 34 On the Options Bar. If it is unlocked. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. For Place By. select 01 Entry Level. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Grid Intersection). double-click 01 Entry Level. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. click Structural Column. Next. 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. click Finish. and on the Options Bar. and unlock it. lock it. select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. ■ 29 While pressing CTRL. 35 Enter 9000 mm. 37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. for From. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). under Floor Plans. select grid line A. click Activate Dimensions. 36 On the Standard toolbar. 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 31 Press ESC. 27 In the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. and press ENTER. 33 While pressing CTRL. select all of the column grid lines. click Camera. Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them.

■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. and click to place the target point of the camera. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 37 . The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.

38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . displays in bold under 3D Views. enter To Building. and click OK. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. under Views (all). named 3D View 1 by default. 43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. The current view. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Beams In this exercise. and then copy them to the subsequent levels. expand 3D Views. and click Rename. “Adding Beams” on page 38. 44 Save the drawing. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan.42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. In the Rename View dialog. ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1.

verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. 10 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. view the icons on the View Control Bar.When you finish adding beams. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 4 Click Medium. under Floor Plans. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . under 3D Views. The selected grid lines display as red. click Beam. select each grid line. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. click Grid. 8 While pressing CTRL. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. double-click 01 Entry Level. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. The view is currently set to Coarse. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. Adding Beams | 39 . The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 9 On the Options Bar. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. click Finish. the icon on the right side of the scale.

All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. right-click. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . which only extend to the 5th level. When you created the columns. 14 Select one of the beams. 12 On the View toolbar. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. click to view the default 3D view of the structure. and click Select All Instances. click Modify. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. and click OK. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. press and hold SHIFT. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. 13 On the Design Bar. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. select 06 Roof. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. select 02 Level.

All of the columns display as red. view the Top Level Constraint parameter. and if necessary. and click Select All Instances. 06 Roof. select 06 Roof. 25 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. click . under 3D Views. right-click. 24 Press ESC. and click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. Adding Beams | 41 . The columns now extend to the top level of the building. right-click. 21 With the column selected. under Instance Parameters. resize the view to see the entire structure. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. and click Element Properties.Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. for Top Level. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 20 Click Cancel. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click To Building.

under Elevations. Click Detail Level. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. and click Hidden line. as lines only. 28 Save the drawing. area. double-click South. but want to display them in less detail. “Adding Braces” on page 43. and click Coarse. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines.

you create 8 framing elevation views.Adding Braces In this exercise. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. under Floor Plans. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. double-click the elevation marker arrow. you add braces to the four corners of the building structure. To better add the braces to the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. and press ESC to end the command. click Framing Elevation. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. verify Attach to Grid is selected. Adding Braces | 43 .

The associated framing elevation view displays. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 11 Using the same technique. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. click Brace. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view. and when the endpoint snap displays. After you add the final brace. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. but when placed the braces are placed. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. click to specify the start point of the brace. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. press ESC.

and press ENTER.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. The height of the roof lowers. Adding Braces | 45 .

and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 21 Select grid line A. enter 12000 mm. Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 19 In the Project Browser. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 10000 mm. under Floor Plans. click twice to restore the original level heights. double-click 00 Foundation. but this time add them from right to left. 14 On the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER. as shown in the 3D view below. click Activate Dimensions. double-click 00 Foundation. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. under Floor Plans.

24 In the Project Browser. click 3 times to restore the locked dimension. and roof height. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. double-click 00 Foundation. grid size. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. Creating a Foundation | 47 . open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. “Creating a Foundation” on page 47. double-click 3D. under Elevations. under Floor Plans. 29 In the Project Browser. Test connectivity of the columns. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 31 Save the drawing. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. double-click South. under 3D Views.23 In the Project Browser. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. beams. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. 26 In the Project Browser. and if necessary. lock it. and drag it away from the structure.

48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . After you load the pile cap family.rfa. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm.Before you can add the pile caps. Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). expand Families. and how to load specific families into a project. and press ESC. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. click Edit. for View Range. under Extents. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. A warning displays. under View Depth. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. click Training Files. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. In the View Range dialog. for Level. The pile cap has been added in the view. In the Element Properties dialog. and drag it to the drawing area. under Floor Plans. 9 Close the warning dialog. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. The foundation pile cap now displays. and click View Properties. Click OK twice. select Unlimited. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and expand Structural Foundation. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software.

Creating a Foundation | 49 . 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. under 3D Views. press ESC. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. and click Create Similar. When the final pile cap is placed. 13 In the Project Browser.

3 In the Type Selector. right-click. 4 On the Design Bar. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. You load new column. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available.14 Click File menu ➤ Save. beams. and brace families into the project. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. View the round hollow columns in the building model. you change the types of the columns. click Training Files. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. and braces that you used to create the building structure. “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. click Modify. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. under 3D Views. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. 2 Select one of the columns.5CHS. and click Select All Instances. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12.rvt. beam. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 3D. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . All of the columns in the building model display as red.

select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203. right-click. select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. 16 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. and click Select All Instances. enter 75 mm. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . 6 In the Type Selector. 17 While pressing CTRL.6x15. click Edit/New. select the braces in the elevation one by one. under Dimensions. The brace type changes. Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click . You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. select M_Round Bar: 25mm. enter 75 mm. click . click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. you change the brace type. In the following steps. click Modify. click Duplicate.9. for d. 13 In the Name dialog. click Modify. and changing its size parameter. the braces as well as the beams change.Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams.2x101. 9 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. double-click Elevation 1-a. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 18 In the Type Selector. click Brace. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm. This not the size that you want to use. for Type.

You are now in the sketch editor. you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. To create floors. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. and railings are also created from sketches. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. stairs. Some other Revit Architecture elements. click Training Files. such as roofs. “Adding Floors” on page 52. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. click Floor. Adding Floors In this exercise. and elements in the current view display as gray.rvt. In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Lines. under Floor Plans. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. ■ On the Sketch tab.

Do not lock the dimensions. and then the 1st horizontal grid line. past the first vertical grid line. click . If the grid changes size. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it.■ ■ On the Options Bar. Leave this dimension unlocked. 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Move the cursor to the left. Adding Floors | 53 . Do not lock the dimension. At the top left corner of the grid. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension. select the top floor line. click Dimension. as you resize it in the next steps. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. Using a crossing window.

If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. click Quit Sketch. and change their values to 300 mm. Select and lock the dimensions. 8 Select the floor. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. on the Design Bar. They display on the floor sketch. click . Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click the temporary dimension value. select the top floor line.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. using a different sketching technique. 7 On the Design Bar. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. Move the cursor to the right dimension. this is how you would do it. click Modify. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. and then press ESC. At the top left corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. Enter 300 mm. Next. press ENTER.

■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. double-click 02 Level. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. click . and press ESC. click Finish Sketch. On the Options Bar. and for Offset. and lock the dimensions. Adding Floors | 55 . 14 On the Design Bar. Select the three remaining floor lines. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. On the Sketch tab. click Floor. The 02 Level floor displays. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. enter 1500mm. click Lines.

Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. and a lock icon displays. double-click 03 Level. click . Click the locks to constrain the floors. 18 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. click Floor. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. under Floor Plans. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. click Align . 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 20 On the Tools toolbar.

View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors | 57 . and click Activate Dimensions. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 38 In the Project Browser. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. double-click {3D}. double-click 00 Foundation. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. under Floor Plans. 32 Select the floor. 31 In the Project Browser. and unlock it. 39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 37 On the View Control Bar. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors. and lock the edges. click Edit.24 On the Design Bar. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. and click OK. under Views ➤ 3D Views. and click Shading with Edges. Alternatively. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. double-click 01 Entry Level. and on the Options Bar. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. and enter 4500 mm. 40 Select grid line A. select 05 Roof Garden. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. click Finish Sketch. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 35 On the Design Bar. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style.

“Adding a Roof ” on page 58. under 3D Views. double-click 00 Foundation. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building.42 In the Project Browser. 43 On the Standard toolbar. click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm. and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 44 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click {3D} to view the grid. under Floor Plans.

under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Lines.To create the roof. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 06 Roof. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. of the roof in a plan view. click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You sketch the footprint. 3 On the Design Bar. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. enter 1800 mm. When a green dashed line displays. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E.rvt. click to place the roof line. Adding a Roof | 59 . and press ENTER. or the perimeter. and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ ■ For Offset. Click . 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope.

■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 10 Press ESC. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. and when the green dashed line displays. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line. For Offset. click to place the roof line. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.6 Select grid line 5. enter 0 mm. click (Trim/Extend). and lock it. 7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. and lock it.

View the roof 19 On the View toolbar. click . click Finish Roof. enter 4. under Floor Plans. Adding a Roof | 61 .12 Optionally. 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. and click OK. View the roof 14 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click 06 Roof. 17 Select the roof.00. under Dimensions. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. for Slope Angle. click . place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them. click .

Under Construction.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. the curtain wall resizes with it. Click OK twice. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. under Floor Plans. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. for Type. click Training Files. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. 6 In the Name dialog. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . enter 2100 mm. for Spacing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. click 01 Entry Level. enter Retail Storefront. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 1050 mm. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. click Wall. click Duplicate. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. When you duplicate a type. and click OK. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. The type is saved in the project. so if you resize the grid. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. 3 In the Type Selector. you add a curtain wall. for Spacing. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. for Join Condition. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall: Storefront.

the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. 13 On the Design Bar. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. click (Trim/Extend). and lock the dimensions. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 10 When a green dashed line displays. and trim each curtain wall segment. For Offset. If the grid moves. enter 600 mm. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. If you want to hide them. click Dimension. select 01 Entry Level.■ ■ ■ For Level. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 . dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid. For Height. select 05 Roof Garden. so they remain in the view. you can delete the dimension. These dimensions are not in a sketch. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint.

Click Model Graphics Style. “Creating an Entrance” on page 65. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. and click Shading with Edges. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. double-click To Building. under 3D Views.View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. and click Hidden Line.

select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns.rvt. click All. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click South. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance | 65 . and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. 4 On the Model Categories tab. 6 Under Visibility. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. under Views (all). clear one element to clear all the elements. click Training Files. Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level. under the element list. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 Under Visibility.Creating an Entrance In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click Medium. To better work with the curtain wall panels. and click None. All the elements in the list are selected.

7 Click OK. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area.Do not select Columns. 12 With the panels selected. 9 On the Design Bar. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. select System Panel: Solid. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select Architectural Elevation. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 15 Zoom to the drawing extents. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. in the Type Selector. 10 Select 1 panel. press and hold CTRL. and click OK. click Modify. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 When all 9 panels are selected.

18 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating an Entrance | 67 . click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics.16 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 17 In the Project Browser. in this case an architectural elevation.

click Add or Remove Segments. and click to select it. click Curtain Grid. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation).20 In the Project Browser. double-click South. select another mullion to the right. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 24 On the Options Bar. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.

32 In the Type Selector. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. click . Creating an Entrance | 69 . and view the new entrance. 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. and unpin it. 34 On the View toolbar.27 On the Options Bar. select One Segment.

36 Zoom in to the first panel. select it. and unpin it. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . press TAB until it is selected. 39 Using the same process. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 38 Press DELETE. and 4th panels. 3rd. remove the mullions from the 2nd.

open the North elevation. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. under Graphics. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. for Underlay. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Training Files. 5 Click OK. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. select 02 Level. under Floor Plans. and click View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.40 Optionally. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 . 3 Right-click in the view. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The cursor changes to a pencil. which indicates you must draw the callout. and specify a point to complete the callout. click Callout.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 8 Select the callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. select the grip closest to the callout head.

Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. 14 Press ESC. and specify a point past grid line D. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 16 Select the section box. 12 Draw a section line. right-click. and click Rename. 13 Select the section line. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. enter Display Area. 10 In the Rename View dialog.9 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 . under Floor Plans. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. click Section. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. and click Flip Section.

under Floor Plans. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. right-click Section 1. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Align). 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . and lock the dimension. 21 In the Type Selector. and click Rename. expand Sections (Building Section). 19 In the Project Browser. for Prefer. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. select Wall faces. For Loc Line. 25 Press ESC. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. click Ceiling. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. click Dimension. under Ceiling Plans. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. and lock the dimension. 26 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr).17 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Type Selector. Lock both alignments. Click . 24 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Wall. select Finish Face: Exterior. enter Section Display Area. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. 27 On the Options Bar.

■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls. and click to select the walls. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). click Finish Sketch. . 36 Press ESC. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 . The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 39 On the View Control Bar.■ Click Click . press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. click . 37 On the Design Bar. double-click Section Display Area. 41 On the Options Bar.

select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. enter 2700 mm. under Ceiling Plans. 44 Select the ceiling. 46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. on the Tools toolbar. click Move. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 43 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. and click . and click OK. press TAB until you select the wall chain. enter 2700 mm. 47 In the Project Browser. for Height Offset From Level. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. To position the grid. and specify a distance. click Attach. for Base Offset. and click to select the walls. click Modify. select a grid line. Select the 02 Level Floor. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top/Base. and click OK.42 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall. under Constraints. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Constraints.

click Edit/New. 52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 57 On the Options Bar. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. view the ceiling structure. Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. click Cancel. for Structure. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 . 58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. click Cancel. 53 Click OK. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit. click (Rotate). and click . under Construction. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type.View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. 51 In the Type Properties dialog.

59 Click. 60 Press ESC. and press ENTER. 61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. enter 45. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

double-click To Building. “Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 64 On the View Control Bar. and then copying it to the 05 Level. 63 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows On. under 3D Views. 65 Optionally. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 . 66 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. click Shadows Off. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building.

5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Training Files. click to specify the start point of the reference plane.rvt. and 3. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 3 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor vertically.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You will create the stair in the area between these columns. C. 2. click Ref Plane.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 .■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2. click Stairs. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining.

select Basic Wall: Generic . and specify a point. 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . including its handrails. and lock the alignment.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. Move the cursor down. click Wall. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. The complete stair displays. beyond the end of the stair. 16 Using the same technique. and click to select it. 13 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. select Finish Face: Interior. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. and select the 2nd reference plane. 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair.225mm Masonry. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. ■ 12 Draw walls around the stair. with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. click Align. 10 In the Type Selector. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. Click .

select Wall faces. select the dimension value. 23 While pressing CTRL. 22 On the Standard toolbar. and specify a point away from the wall. Select the interior face of the wall. 19 Select the dimension. Lock the dimension. click Dimension. click . but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. a warning displays. Click Modify.17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select the bottom of the stair. for Prefer. enter 1200 mm. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. The stair and walls move to the left. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 . and press DELETE. 20 Click OK to delete the dimension. select both reference planes. Select the wall. 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. and press ENTER. 21 Select the stair. Because the dimension is constrained.

select 05 Roof Garden. but if you view the top level of the building. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. Click OK. clear Tag on Placement. 33 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. and move the cursor to spin the building model. press and hold the left mouse button. and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 28 On the Design Bar. select all 4 walls. 35 Press SHIFT. 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. TIP To flip the door swing. select 00 Foundation. Click OK. 25 In the Type Selector.Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. 26 On the Options Bar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Base Constraint. click Door. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click . 31 Select the stair. click . you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. for Multistory Top Level. click Modify. . verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. click 34 On the View toolbar. 29 While pressing CTRL. For Top Constraint. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen.

. 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and lock the alignment. Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door. double-click 01 Entry Level. 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click . 37 Zoom in to the stairs. and lock the alignments.Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 . 41 On the Tools toolbar. 45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. click Align. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click . select Up to Level: 06 Roof. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . enter 300 mm. click . double-click 01 Entry Level. . under Floor Plans. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. click 56 On the View toolbar. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 52 In the Project Browser. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden.49 In the Select Levels dialog. and spin the building so you can see the roof. and click OK. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. . and click OK. By offsetting the base. 53 Select the shaft. click 51 On the View toolbar. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. 55 On the View toolbar. for Base Offset. ■ For Top Constraint.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87.58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 . and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and press ENTER. select Core Face: Interior. 2 Right-click in the view. 10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. Select the dimension value. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Modify. select Basic Wall: Generic . for Underlay. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select 06 Roof. 5 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Wall.225mm Masonry. 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. Select the wall. under Graphics. and click View Properties. for Loc Line. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3. and click OK.Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Enter 1050 mm.

double-click Elevation: South. 19 Press ESC. and click to place a line. and on the Options Bar. 23 Press ESC. click (Align). 22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor up 4500 mm.11 On the Tools toolbar. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 17 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. click Modify. Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Go To View dialog. The South elevation displays. 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. click Lines. 15 Select the wall. move the cursor up 6000 mm. and then select the right face of the wall. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . and click to place a line. and click to place a line. click Lines. 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. click Edit Profile.

32 Click Modify. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays. 29 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. 27 Press ESC. click Lines. 30 Using the Quadrant snap. and click (Circle). 28 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). Press ESC. Select the top right portion of the circle. Select the short right profile line. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and click to place it. click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools. Select the top right portion of the circle. and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 31 Move the cursor to the left.24 On the Design Bar. click . 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Lines. snap to the top of the circle. and select it. Select the top horizontal profile line.

instead of lengthening the existing edge. 35 On the Options Bar.34 On the Design Bar. 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. click . and press DELETE. click Modify. click the Close button. 42 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 45 On the Options Bar. and click to place it. 44 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. 47 Click Cancel. You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. note that for Top Constraint. 38 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and press DELETE. 40 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. select the short horizontal line on the right. By adding extra height to the wall. click . under Constraints. and select the wall. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch. you maintained the relationship to the roof level. click Continue. 39 In the Error dialog. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays. 43 In the Warning dialog. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . unlock it.

Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. click to restore the original height of the roof. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92. double-click 3D. you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to load these components into the project. 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. and how to place and adjust them in project views. View the wall 50 In the Project Browser. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk.49 On the Standard toolbar. under 3D Views.

click Training Files. between grid lines C and D. as shown. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 . double-click 05 Roof Garden. 3 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\m_RRB_host.rvt. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Component. Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser. TIP After you place the 1st planter. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

click Edit/New. click . double-click 01 Entry Level. and on the Options Bar. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 15 In the Name dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. for Plant Height. and in the Type Selector. 11 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Type Selector. 12 Select 1 of the trees. 10 View the roof. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Component.5 Meters. select Tree . click Duplicate. for Type. under Other. and click OK. 17 Click Apply.5 Meters. click . 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 While pressing CTRL. under Floor Plans.5. select M_Tree . Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser. and then click OK twice. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof.5 On the Basics tab. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 8 On the View toolbar. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ESC. under Floor Plans. enter Cornus Florida 1. enter 1500 mm. select the 2 remaining trees.

21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. click Floor. and click to sketch a line. and click to sketch a line. 26 Using the same method. enter 2400 mm. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 . for Offset. 29 Select the right vertical floor line. ■ ■ For Offset. and click to place the line. 25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. enter 0 mm. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 23 On the Options Bar: Click . 27 On the Options Bar.

30 On the Options Bar. click (Trim/Extend). and click to finish the line. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. move the cursor up 900 mm. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 38 On the Design Bar. 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and click to finish the line. The completed sidewalk displays. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. clear Chain. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 35 Select the line that you just drew. click Finish Sketch. 34 On the Tools toolbar. click . 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

In plan view. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. select M_RPC Male: Alex. 53 In the Type Selector. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. enter -250 mm. near Column E5. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rotate after placement. 42 In the Name dialog. click Component. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point.Next. click Edit/New. 48 In the Type Selector. 39 Select the sidewalk. 49 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. under Constraints. create a new type for the sidewalk element. click . 43 Click OK twice. for Height Offset from Level. 45 Click OK. for Type. 52 Move the cursor toward the column. as it is currently a floor element. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Sidewalk. click Duplicate. The circle is divided in half by a line. and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight. RPC people are represented by a circle. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk.

and click OK. 57 Press ESC. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. under Elevations. click the car. under Constraints. enter -300 mm. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. and on the Options Bar. 63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. for Offset. click Camera. When you select a host for a component. click Pick Host. 64 Select Cathy. 59 In the camera view (3D View 1). and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. select M_RPC Beetle. 60 In the Element Properties dialog. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. Next. 61 In the Project Browser. 55 In the Type Selector. double-click West.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. and click .

double-click To Building. click Pick Host. 69 Using the same method. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 66 Select Alex. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. under 3D Views. and replace them with a service core. 68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. 71 Proceed to the next exercise. View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99.65 Click the sidewalk. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. and on the Options Bar. 67 Click the sidewalk. If the sidewalk changes height. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 . pick the sidewalk as the host for the car.

click Training Files. so it will cut through the floors of the building. 3 Select the entire stairwell. you delete the entire stairwell. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. double-click 06 Roof. and shaft opening. click .The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project.rvt. After the service core is linked to your project. including the stairs. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. . you must cut another shaft opening around it. press SHIFT. 4 On the View toolbar. walls. and press DELETE. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. and spin the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser. click 5 On the View toolbar.

10 At the bottom of the dialog. 12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D. 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 13 On the Tools toolbar.rvt. Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. The building service core displays in your drawing. click Training Files. Select Cursor at center. 9 In the Metric folder. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 .Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models. 14 Select the top horizontal floor line. click (Align). and then select the top horizontal core wall. select m_RRB_link. 11 Click Open.

17 On the Options Bar. click Lines. View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar. click 24 On the View toolbar. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select Chain. enter 300 mm. 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click Finish Sketch. For Top Constraint. Under Constraints. 16 On the Design Bar. click . 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 18 On the Options Bar. select Up to level: 06 Roof.Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Base Offset. click . Click OK.

The rendering displays. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. press SHIFT. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . 3 In the new project. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. and open Metric\m_Conference. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in the Project Browser. you add glass railings around the floor edges.rvt. click Training Files. After you modify it.. “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. and spin the building to get a better view of the core. and double-click Lounge Perspective. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. expand Renderings. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. where it is hosted within a railing family.rvt.

and click to split the floor. under Floor Plans. 15 On the Design Bar. The floor sketch displays. 13 On the Options Bar. press and hold CTRL. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 12 Select the floor. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt. double-click 02 Level. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building. and select Glass. click Modify. and Parapet. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. Handrail only. and on the Options Bar.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. click (Split). 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser. click Edit. click OK. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays. and expand Railings. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. expand Families. 5 Expand Railing.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser.

select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 26 Select grid line D. 27 On the Tools toolbar. click . and click the lock to lock the alignment. 25 Select grid line B. and lock the alignment. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. click (Align). 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. and click the lock to lock the alignment. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm.18 On the Design Bar. and click to draw another line. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . 23 Complete the sketch as shown. and click to place it. click Lines. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D.

34 In the Element Properties dialog. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. and click OK. 37 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Finish Sketch.rvt project. Lock the dimensions. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . click Railing Properties.29 On the Design Bar. click Railing. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 33 On the Design Bar. enter 100 mm. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. for Type. click Dimension. For Offset. click Dimension. select Glass.

39 Click Finish Sketch. You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 . click Camera. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.

■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 43 Close all project drawings.

and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. lofty ceilings. balconies. exterior fire stairs. 109 . The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. and a roof garden. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors.

NOTE For training purposes. 110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects . slight modifications to the building design have been made.

including plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial. section. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. elevation. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.

Creating Views In this lesson. you learn how to create views from a building model. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You learn how to create new views from existing views. 112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. how to create section and elevation views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans.

expand Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click OK. Duplicating Plan Views | 113 . enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 4 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 7 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans.

12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 14 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. and click 1: 1000. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 11 Under Floor Plans. click the current scale. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Vicinity Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. Next.

rvt. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 .16 Right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

click Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Building Elevation. select1:100. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. for Scale. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.rvt.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. double-click Level 1. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 . 10 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Elevations. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. enter South East. and click OK. click Modify. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click South East.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. select 1:100. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. under Views (all). ■ Move the cursor down. 14 In the Type Selector. select Section: Building Section. 15 On the Options Bar.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. click Section. expand Floor Plans.

Click the midpoint of the section line. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. click Split Segment. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 . drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

23 On the View Control Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. click Modify. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .21 On the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. 24 Select gridline F. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.25 On the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. To create each view. click Modify. Creating Callout Views | 121 . you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.rvt. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

for Scale. and specify a point to complete the callout. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. double-click Level 1. select 1:50. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar. click Callout. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. click Modify. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. under Floor Plans. select Floor Plan. and select the callout boundary. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

enter Enlarged Stair Plan. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.■ Select the middle grip. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 9 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Creating Callout Views | 123 . and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

for Scale. select 1:50. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. click Callout.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sections (Building Sections). double-click Section 1. 13 In the Type Selector. select Detail View: Detail.

Creating Callout Views | 125 . and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Details). 17 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. expand Detail Views (Details).

and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. You change the appearance of the section mark head. the elevation markers.

Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. Section Tail . 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 12 For Section Tag. select Custom-Section Head. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans.rfa. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. open Metric\Families\Annotations. click the Annotation Objects tab. and click OK. and click OK.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 4 On the Design Bar.Filled. Section Tail – Filled. and click OK twice. .rvt. select Section Head . click Edit/New. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . select the section line. and can be applied to the section line. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click Load into Project. select the current project. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 15 Under Category. and click Open. scroll to Section Line. 8 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays.Custom. 10 On the floor plan. and click OK. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. clear any others. double-click Level 1. click Duplicate. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. for Section Head.

and select 2. Click OK. select Custom-Callout Head.5mm Square. select 12. 22 In the Name dialog. enter 12. select 3. click Load into Project. For Dimensions ➤ Width. On the floor plan. 30 On the Design Bar. On the floor plan. enter 12. notice the square elevation markers that display. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. 19 Click OK. clear all others. and click OK. 27 Click OK twice.rfa. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. . The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays.5mm Square. and click OK. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Under Category. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Duplicate. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. select Square. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. select the current project.5 mm. scroll to Section Marks. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. For Line Weight. for Elevation Tag. click Edit/New. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. and select 3. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. open Metric\Families\Annotations.

enter . 45 For Line Pattern. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. 39 Click OK twice. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 43 Under Category. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head.33 In the Type Properties dialog. select Dash. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . enter 6 mm. select the callout. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Duplicate. 40 Press ESC. 46 Under Category. Click OK. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. . The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click the Annotation Objects tab. 36 In the drawing. scroll down to Callout Boundary. click Edit/New. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 Click OK. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. and select 4. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select . The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. For Corner Radius. 34 In the Name dialog. for Callout Tag. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. expand Callout Boundary. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. and select 7. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head.

you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. click Training Files. and visual overrides. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You learn to create view templates. 130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . masking regions. under Elevations. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. filters.rvt. To accomplish this.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The crop region displays as red. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. view regions. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. Creating a View Template In this exercise. and double-click East. and apply it to multiple elevation views.

click Zoom to Fit. 8 Click OK. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 5 On the View Toolbar. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Entourage. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 . 4 On the Design Bar. clear Crop Region Visible. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. under Extents. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. and click Properties.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. under Elevations. right-click East. 6 On the Project Browser. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. 13 Under Visibility.

14 Click OK. double-click North. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. 18 In the View Templates dialog. elevation markers. right-click East. right-click North. 19 In the Project Browser. 17 In the New View Template dialog. Callouts. 132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . levels. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 16 In the Project Browser. grids. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 15 On the View Control bar. and click Create View Template From View. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. click OK. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. click Apply. under Elevations. under Elevations. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. and click OK. 20 In the Project Browser.

23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Click OK twice. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Level Below (Level 4). for View Range. and the exterior area on the south side of the building.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 . for Level. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan.rvt. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Penthouse. select Penthouse. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. under Extents. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click Properties. for Bottom. Under View Depth. select Level Below (Level 4).rvt. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan.

right-click. Under View Depth. under Extents. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Range. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK twice. select Level 4. for Bottom.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. double-click Roof Plan. click Edit. and click Properties. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Roof Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. for Level. under Floor Plans.

click Lines. 17 On the Design Bar. In the left corner of the building. click Region Property. select Unlimited. for View Range. for Level. Click OK twice. click Modify. Move you cursor diagonally. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. Under View Depth. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Finish Sketch. 10 On the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Edit. 13 On the Design Bar.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Plan Region. for Bottom. select Unlimited. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. under Extents. 16 On the Design Bar.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. After you apply the filter. 1 In the Project Browser. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Views (all). 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. 7 In the Filters dialog. under Categories.rvt. click (New). and double-click Level 1. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. under Filters. in this case. and click OK. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the fire rating of the walls. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. select Fire Rating. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Filters tab. select Walls. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 5 In the Filters dialog. click Edit/New. enter Rated Walls. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

and click OK. 10 On the Filter tab. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. click No Override. Masking Portions of a View | 137 . The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 Click OK. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 17 Using the same method. 9 Click OK. To accomplish this. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. Enter Hr. and click OK. click OK. click Add.■ ■ Select contains. under Projection/Surface. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. for Rated Walls. for Color. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. 14 In the Color dialog. under Basic colors. 11 Select Rated Walls. for Pattern. select Solid Fill. click Override under Patterns. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. click Remove. 12 On the Filter tab. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select the red color.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click. and click Rename. click Show Crop Region. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. as shown. 5 On the View menu. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 On the View Control Bar.

click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 9 On the View Control Bar.7 On the View menu. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. Masking Portions of a View | 139 . click (Rectangle). 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. select Invisible lines. 12 On the Options Bar. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the crop region. click Masking Region.

14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. under Floor Plans. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.Level 1. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Unit 18 Plan . You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan.

7 Under Cut. 11 Click OK twice. and click Rename. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click Override. for Pattern. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. select Walls. select Solid fill. under Pattern Overrides. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Visibility. for Color. and click 1: 50. click in the Patterns field. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and click OK. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. right-click. right-click. and click OK. click the current scale. click black. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. click No Override.

14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Grids. 16 Under Visibility. click Modify. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. under Visibility. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. clear Floors.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 143 .18 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Category.

the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. select Dash. and click OK twice. click Projection Lines. 23 In the Color dialog. and click OK. for Color. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection. 25 Click OK twice. for Pattern. click a purple color. click No Override. under Lines. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 28 For Color. select a bright green color. click By Category Override. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 29 In the Color dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select the sofa. 21 Under Projection/Surface. click Override.20 Right-click. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog.

Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. The hidden crop region is also revealed. click . right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 145 . The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.30 On the Design Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps. 33 On the View Control Bar. click . and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click Modify.

34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. 146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. click Training Files. and click View. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.rvt. select A0 metric. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. right-click. how to add views to the sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.Creating Sheets. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks.

A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . enter A101. expand Sheets (all). enter Site Plan. on the Options Bar. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 3 In the Project Browser.Unnamed. For Sheet Name. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. 5 When the title block highlights. click Modify. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). For Sheet Number. and select the title block. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar.

enter 2007-1. 148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Click OK. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 14 Click OK. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 2007. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Number. enter For Approval. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Status. For Project Name. Smith. for Project Address. click Edit. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. under Other. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. enter J. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter 15 May. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Client Name. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date.

select Level 1. and click Save. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and click OK. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. right-click. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. select the new sheet name. 4 On the Design Bar. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Elevations A105 .rvt. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. you add views to these sheets.Elevations A106 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 In the Project Browser. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. enter Floor Plan. and click OK.Stairs In the following exercise. and click Rename.rvt. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.Floor Plan. double-click A102 .Sections A108 . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . for Name.Elevations A107 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. Adding Views to Sheets | 149 .Layout Plan A104 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. under Sheets (all). select A0 metric. and click to place the view. and drag it to the sheet. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

Elevations.The red border around the view no longer displays. 6 In the Project Browser. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click A104 . and click to place it. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). align it with the East elevation. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 8 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. click Modify.

Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. select 1:5. for View Scale. under Sheets (all). and click OK. double-click A107 . click Modify. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. 12 On the Design Bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 151 . 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and on the Options Bar. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. . and click to place it. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet.Sections. 16 Select title bar.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog.

under Floor Plans. zoom in to the grip. 152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . move the cursor over it. and press TAB until it highlights.Stairs. click Modify. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. double-click Level 1. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click A108 . under Sheets (all). 21 Zoom to the stair callout. and click to place it. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Under Floor Plans. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser.

Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and then make changes and deactivate the view. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.Sections. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. In order to do this.rvt.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. double-click A107 . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you must first activate the view on the sheet. under Sheets (all).

and click Activate View. enter 16700 mm. and press ENTER. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.2 Select the building section view. double-click North. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 6 Right-click. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. 5 On the Design Bar. right-click. click Modify.

Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select the new sheet name. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Properties. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Click OK. under Floor Plans. You modify the view to hide the view title. After you create the sheet. enter T. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.rvt. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. and click OK. click Camera. enter Title Sheet.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. 7 Place the camera as shown. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. For Sheet Name. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select A0 metric. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. The camera view displays. double-click Level 1.

10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 12 On the View Control Bar. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Far Clip Offset. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. enter100000 mm. 13 In the Project Browser. 14 Under 3D Views. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 11 On the View Control Bar. Click OK. For Target Elevation. Under Camera. double-click T . under Sheets (all). enter 1500 mm. Under Extents.8 On the Options Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. for Eye Elevation. select Far Clip Active.Title Sheet. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. enter 18000 mm.

19 Select the view on the sheet. and then click OK. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. 24 Click OK twice. for Height. for Show title. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. and click OK. under Graphics. select No.15 With the view selected. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. select Scale (locked proportions). click Duplicate. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Under Model Crop Size. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 . enter 635 mm. click Modify. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Name dialog. . click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Size. enter Viewport/no title mark. on the Options Bar.

and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

such as doors and windows. such as room and window schedules. 159 . in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. You also learn to create different types of schedules.Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.

you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. right-click in the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. Because of the open style floor plan. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. and click Room and Area. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Level 1. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.Tagging Objects In this lesson. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. click Room Separation.rvt. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 . as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. move the cursor to the right.

The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. indicating that it can be edited. click OK. 9 In the Tags dialog. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. The room tag number displays in blue. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. click Training Files. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click Room. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to place the room and tag. 11 In the Tags dialog. click Load. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 On the Options Bar. and the rectangle contains the room tag. and select the room tag.rfa. 15 On the Design Bar.

■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 . Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 17 Click the room text label. 18 On the Design Bar.16 Zoom in on the tag number. enter U18-1. click Modify. Click to place the new room and tag. enter Entry. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. click it. click Room.

21 Click the room text label. click Modify. Sequential letters are also supported. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. 20 On the Design Bar. Dining. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. and press ENTER. enter Kitchen. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

28 On the Design Bar. expand Lines. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. click Modify. clear Room Separation. Model Categories tab.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.Level 2. click Room Tag. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you learn how to place door and window tags. The rooms are already placed. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. but they need to be tagged.Level 1. expand Floor Plans. in the Project Browser. and click OK.rvt. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 . under Floor Plans. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and moving clockwise. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.rvt. 26 On the Design Bar. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

for Mark. click Tag ➤ By Category. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. and click OK. under Identify Data.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter U18-2. clear Leader. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. click (Properties). 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and press ENTER. 3 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter U18-1.

under Category. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 13 On the Design Bar. select Door Tags.Level 2. click Tag All Not Tagged. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 . 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click OK. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. expand Floor Plans. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 21 Click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 19 In the Tags dialog. click Load. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. 168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Window.rfa. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway.

28 Select Window Tags. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 26 On the View toolbar. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . expand Floor Plans. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 5 At the confirmation prompt. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. select Leader. 25 Under Floor Plans. 4 Select a dining room chair. click Training Files. click Yes to load a tag. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 2. and modify the tag placement and display.rvt.Level 1. 3 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category.

14 Click Modify. 12 Click the elbow control. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and drag it above the chair tag. and on the Options Bar. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 13 Optionally. clear Leader. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). 9 Click Modify. 11 Select the tag for the table.

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. 18 On the Design Bar. Tagging Other Objects | 171 .16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click (Filter Selection).Level 2. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Options Bar. and on the Design Bar. and click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. double-click Unit 18 Plan .

you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. select Furniture Tags. and click Modify.21 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector. click Check None. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. you learn to add schedules. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

click Training Files. in which windows are listed by window type. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. Next.You begin by creating a window instance schedule.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. that is. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. a schedule that lists every window in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Finally.

expand Floor Plans. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 7 Using the same method. select Windows. enter Building Window Schedule. click the Fields tab. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. and click OK. select Comments and click Add. 6 Under Available fields. 9 Click OK. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click View. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. 174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click in the Design Bar. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. 4 For Name.

NOTE By clicking Show. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. for Sort by. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. right-click the schedule. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. in large building models with many views. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . and on the Options Bar. select Type Mark. this can be a time-consuming process. and click View Properties. click Close. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Show. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. However. and click OK twice. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. If no open view shows the selected element. under Other. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. expand Schedules/Quantities. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. you are prompted to open one that does. 13 In the Project Browser. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. click Edit. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

double-click Level 2. sorted by type mark. clear Itemize every instance. under Floor Plans. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. click Edit. under Other. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. 22 Click OK twice.The window schedule is displayed. and click View Properties. The window type schedule is displayed. for Sorting/Grouping. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. and press ENTER. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A.

click Add to create the new parameter. enter Head Detail. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category.rvt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. expand Schedules/Quantities. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. For Group parameter under. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. unlike shared parameters.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Under Parameter Data. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 . select Construction. select Type. and sill conditions for a window can be found. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. for Name. jamb. For Discipline.rvt. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. click OK. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. you cannot use them to tag objects. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and double-click Building Window Schedule. In this case. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 5 Click OK. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and.

TIP To select all 3 headers. select Head Detail. Jamb Detail. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. under Other. and Sill Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. under Available fields. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. so that they are listed before Comments. and click Properties. right-click Building Window Schedule. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. click Group. 12 Click OK twice. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. for Fields. and while pressing the left mouse button. select the following fields. click in the Head Detail header. enter Window Details. 178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. under Type Mark A. enter 1/A107. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. For example. click Schedule/Quantities. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 4 Click OK. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Fields tab. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 . Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Jamb Detail. enter 2/A107. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Under Name.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. 3 In the New Schedule dialog.Door Schedule. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. select the following fields. enter 3/A107. expand Floor Plans. Enter U18 in the third field.Level 1. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Select contains in the second field. enter Unit 18 . 6 Under Available fields. select Doors. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . You then hide the column used for the filter. Verify Schedule building components is selected. and for Sill Detail. for Head Detail.

select Family and Type. select Mark. but is not included as a column in the schedule. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. and double-click A102 . 11 Under Field formatting. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). and click OK. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. click Modify. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by.Door Schedule. select Hidden Field. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. expand Sheets (all). 10 Under Fields.Unit 18. click Unit 18 . and drag it to the sheet.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 13 In the Project Browser.

Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Rooms. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. select Number. right-click in the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Floor Plans. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 . Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 On the Design Bar. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. 7 To the right of Header text. and click OK. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan.rvt. 8 Click OK. double-click Level 1. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. 5 Using the same method. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Modify. under Category. under Available fields. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. and click View. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan.

enter Corridor. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . for room 101.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. select Storage. 11 Using the same method. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 104. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. next to Rows. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. 101-106. The room Number is U17-9. For 105. and press ENTER. enter Building Entry. and press ENTER. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. For 102. for Name. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. enter Storage. and press ENTER. add 5 more rooms. select Corridor. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Edit the number to be 101. click New. For 103.

3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. expand Lines. under Projection/Surface. For Weight. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise.■ For 106. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Under Custom colors. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 . Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. place rooms from a program list. In the Lines field. select 9. double-click Level 1. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. and modify room names. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. For Room Separation. click Override. click Room Separation. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. under Floor Plans. click the Lines field. click the bright green swatch. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. enter Stair. you add room separation lines. In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and press ENTER. and click OK. click the Color field.

Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. First. 8 On the Design Bar. 184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room. click Modify. draw the horizontal line.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.

for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 12 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 2400 mm. select 102 Storage. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right). for Room. select 101 Building Entry. 13 For Offset. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 .

14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. under Floor Plans. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. 16 On the Design Bar. and zoom in to the Corridor. double-click Level 1. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. 18 In the Project Browser. 186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. click Modify. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. double-click Room Schedule.

click (Properties). click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Schedule. 30 For Key Name. select Rooms. under Category. 22 On the Design Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls.19 While pressing CTRL. enter As Selected. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). while pressing CTRL. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. and click Add. 29 On the Options Bar. Floor Finish. and Wall Finish. 26 Select Schedule keys. and click OK. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. click New to add a new row. select Base Finish. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and for all 3 finishes. and click OK. enter Units. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 . click Schedule/Quantities. clear Room Bounding. under Available fields.

select Rooms. under Schedules/Quantities. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Check None. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. for Room Style. for Available fields. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. Zoom flyout. double-click Room Schedule. for Fields. 32 In the Project Browser. 37 Under U17-8. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 42 In the Filter dialog. and click Add. 41 On the Options Bar. select Units. under Other. click (Filter Selection). click Room Style.31 Using the same method. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. double-click Level 1. click Edit. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. click Zoom To Fit. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 35 Click OK twice. and click Properties. 39 On the View toolbar. 36 In the Project Browser. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. right-click Room Schedule.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 . click OK. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. right-click Level 1. enter Room Type. select Room Style. click (Properties). under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. and click OK. and click Properties. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. under Floor Plans. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. select Room Type. 103. select Service. 5 For Title. double-click Room Schedule. 8 Click OK. and 106. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Name. under Identity Data. For rooms 102 and 105.rvt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 6 For Color. under Views (all). select Units. expand Floor Plans. and apply it to the Level 1 view. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). click the Color Scheme field. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Public. and double-click Level 1. enter Room Type.43 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 104. click (Duplicate). 44 In the Element Properties dialog. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. at the warning prompt. 9 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Project Browser. and click OK. for Room Style. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

clear Visible. select the color legend. 16 On the Design Bar. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Edit. for Display Color Fill in. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. expand Lines. select Foreground. and click OK. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. click Modify. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Edit Color Scheme. and clear Room Separation. click Color Scheme Legend. click the value in the Color column. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. and click OK twice. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 18 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Color dialog. select blue. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Custom color.

27 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. for Swatch Width. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 .23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. on the Options Bar. 28 Under Title Text. enter 25 mm. for Size. click Edit/New. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. enter 5 mm. (Properties). 24 Click OK. under Graphics. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. under 3D Views.29 On the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. click Modify. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. 192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.rvt. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials.

EPDM. Clear Itemize every instance. 4 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. and click OK. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 11 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Material: Area.Insulation on Plywood Deck . add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Roofs. Under Field formatting. 12 Click OK. Select Grand totals. under Available fields. Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 . and click Add. For Then by.3 While pressing CTRL. select Family and Type. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. select Material: Description. select Calculate totals. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. click Family and Type. 5 On the Design Bar. 9 Using the same method. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. under Category. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .

enter Estimated Cost. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. for the Material: Cost field. select Calculate totals. and click Properties. 23 In the Material Takeoff.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. and click Properties.80 5. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 21 Click the Formatting tab.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . under Other. 20 Click OK. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. and under Fields. 17 Click Calculated Value. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). click Edit. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 For Formula. click Material: Cost. click Estimated Cost. 24 In the Project Browser. under Available fields. 22 For Field formatting. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. and click Add. for Name. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. for Fields. and click OK twice.40 50.

and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. tag the line. for Formatting. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson.rvt. and schedule the total distance of each path. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. you create a shared parameter file. adding the shared parameters to a family. 27 Click Field Format. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. You draw a travel path line. In this lesson. 28 Click OK 3 times. click Estimated Cost. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog. These shared parameters can be added to any family. select 2 decimal places. click Edit. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters.25 In the Element Properties dialog. you create an exiting plan for the building. and reporting the shared parameters. click Training Files. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. and are defined and stored in an external file. under Fields. regardless of category. ensuring consistency across families and projects. select Fixed. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. For Rounding. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 . creating a generic tag to tag the family. either within family components or within the project template. For Units.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. You then create a generic tag to tag the family.rvt. enter Path ID. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. and click OK. click New.1 In the Project Browser. for Name. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. click Training Files. click Create. select Length. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 7 Under Parameters. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Save. for Type of Parameter. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.rvt. and click OK. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. enter Travel Distance. 9 Under Parameters. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. click New. click New. 11 Click OK. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As.txt. enter Exiting. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. under Groups. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. for Name. for File name.

11 In the Family Types dialog. 12 Click Apply. under Dimensions. for Travel Distance Formula. following the equals symbol (=). click Add. enter Length. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. click Family Types. select Shared parameter. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. If you have multiple projects open. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Family Types dialog. select Constraints. and click OK. click Load into Projects.rvt. and click OK. and click OK. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. and select Instance. 7 For Group parameter under. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog.rfa.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. otherwise the family loads into the current project. in the Load into Projects dialog. under Parameters. and click Select. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 8 Select Instance. click Add. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 . group it under Dimensions. 14 If necessary. Click Training Files.

17 Select Generic Tag. click Training Files.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 On the Design Bar.rft. click Select. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Add. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Label. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 24 On the Design Bar. 198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. and click Open. click Modify. and click OK 3 times. click Label. select Travel Distance.rft.

verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.27 In the drawing window. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. and press DELETE. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and click OK.rvt. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. select Path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 . click Load into Projects. and click Save.rvt is selected. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. for File Name. and move it down. Placing. under Floor Plans.Level 1. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save.Tagging. After the lines are tagged.rfa. double-click Exiting Plan . you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. enter M_Travel Distance Tag. 30 In the Save As dialog. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. Placing. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. 31 On the Design Bar.Tagging.

6 Move the cursor to the right. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click in the center of the corridor. above the exterior door as shown. select Chain. 4 On the Options Bar.2 Zoom in to the corridor. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. click Component.

10 On the Options Bar. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 . double click Exiting Plan . 12 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Placing. under Constraints. 13 While pressing CTRL. clear Leader. verify that Chain is selected.7 Move the cursor down. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and click (Properties).Tagging. 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Path ID. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 8 On the Design Bar. through the door. and click outside of the building. under Floor Plans. and click OK. click Modify. click Component.Level 2. enter 1-1.

202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 On the Design Bar. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click above the door to the stair. move the cursor to the left.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 22 Click at the center starting point. click Component. move the cursor near the right corner.

28 While pressing CTRL. 24 On the Design Bar. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click in the stair. under Constraints. and click OK. enter Level 1 Exit Distance.23 Move the cursor down. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 . enter 2-1. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. (Properties).Tagging. Placing. 27 On the Design Bar. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 33 For Name. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. for Path ID. click Modify. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. under Category. click Modify.

click Schedule/Quantities. for Filter. for Filter by. 43 In the Project Browser. and in the third field. under Other. 36 For Filter by. and click OK twice. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 44 In the Project Browser. select Calculate Totals. 41 Under Fields. select Path ID. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. select Path ID and Travel Distance. select Travel Distance. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. in the third field. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Properties. in the first field. and click Add.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 42 Click OK. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 35 Click the Filter tab. and click Rename. enter 2-. 38 For Sort by. right-click the Design Bar. enter 1-. click Training Files. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. 46 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 40 Click the Formatting tab. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. while pressing CTRL. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and under Field formatting. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View. under Available fields. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. in the second field. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. 45 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit. select contains. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Path ID.

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click the browse button. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Interiors\C10 . expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. click the Value field.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. expand C . select Walls.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 .Fixed Partitions. right-click Generic . and click Properties. click C1010145 . select the following fields. for Assembly Code.152 mm. click the Fields tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 .Partitions . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. under Categories. 4 Under Available fields. and click OK.2 In the New Schedules dialog. and click OK twice. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.

click Export ➤ ODBC Database. Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. and click OK to create the database. under Database. click the File Data Source tab. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. click Training Files. Additionally. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.rvt. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb).mdb for Database Name. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. and open the database in Microsoft Access. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 8 In the New Database dialog. and click Next. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click OK in the dialog. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 10 When the confirmation displays. 6 Click Finish. enter Revit_Project. under Database Name. 10 Close the exercise file. click OK. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog.9 In the schedule. 1 On the File menu. select a location for the database file. 206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. and click Next. 3 Click New. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Create. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 9 Under Directories.

13 Close the exercise file. For example. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 . The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. in addition to the Id column. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. so that each table of elements includes an Id column.

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 209 .

or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.

the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.Relocating a Project In this exercise.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. Relocating a Project | 211 . After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The levels in the project are not shared. select Shared. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). to better demonstrate how shared levels work. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. The south elevation is displayed. click (Properties). click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.Shared Elevation. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Select the Level 1 line. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. If you did that now. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. click Edit/New. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 10 On the View menu. By selecting the Level 1 line. 6 Click OK twice. Under Constraints.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. expand Views (all). 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. However. for Elevation Base. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. and press ENTER. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog. enter 10000 mm. and double-click South. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. and click OK. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . By entering 10000 mm in this step. enter8 mm Head . you specify the new location of the project.

under Elevations. as well as other views of the building model.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. select Level : 8 mm Head . 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 12 In the Type Selector. Relocating a Project | 213 . The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.Shared Elevation. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click North.

the Penthouse level. click Modify. 214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Level : 8 mm Head . All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. and the Roof Plan level.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. In the Type Selector. and select Levels 2-4. On the Design Bar.Shared Elevation.

click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. and save the exercise file with a unique name. multi-segmented. Dimensioning In this lesson. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. In Revit Architecture. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In this case. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. permanent dimensions are created automatically. except when you sketch profiles to complete families.16 If you want to save your changes. and angular dimensions. “Dimensioning” on page 215. and double-click Level 1. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. radial. You place linear. expand Views (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. Dimensioning | 215 . expand Floor Plans.

216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Dimension.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. By default. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. dimensions are aligned. snap to wall centerlines. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. select it. select it. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. and are created by selecting individual reference points.

Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.5 Move the cursor above the view. The lock displays as locked. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 217 . 7 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. click Modify.

11 Using the same method. above the plan view of the building. for Prefer. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 17 Move the cursor up. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. select Wall Faces. and select its left exterior face. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. but below the first dimension that you placed. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 15 Move the cursor to the right. select the right side of the curtain wall.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. 12 13 On the Options Bar. and select it. select the right endpoint of the planter.

and specify a point to place the dimension. 26 Select the radial dimension. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). and select it. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. select Wall faces. click Modify. Creating Dimensions | 219 . click Dimension. For Prefer. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. click Modify.19 On the Basics tab. 21 On the Design Bar. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights.

34 Select the horizontal line. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter Typ. on the Options Bar. click (Properties).28 With the dimension still selected. For Prefer. for Suffix. verify Wall faces is selected. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular).. 220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. 30 On the Basics tab. click Modify. click Dimension.

This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. and click to place the dimension. When you dimension the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. 37 On the Basics tab. 38 Proceed to the next exercise.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. you select only the wall. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. click Modify. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc.

You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. 222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Entire Walls. expand Views (all). select Openings. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click OK.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. For Pick. and select Widths. Click Options. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. and double-click Level 3. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. expand Floor Plans. click Dimension. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. select Wall centerlines. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Controlling Witness Lines | 223 .Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. expand Views (all). click Modify. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. However. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. For example. for a multi-segmented dimension. When you place dimensions.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the automatic dimension string. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. in some cases. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. 7 On the Basics tab. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. and double-click Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223. expand Floor Plans.

For Pick. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. select Individual References. 224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Dimension. select the right edge of the planter. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. move the cursor down. verify Wall centerlines is selected. and select it. 7 Using the same method.

Controlling Witness Lines | 225 . 10 Using the same method.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. and select it. 11 Move the cursor down. and specify a point to place the dimension. select the bottom right endpoint.

and when the wall centerline highlights. 13 On the Options Bar. select Wall centerlines. click Dimension. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. select it. click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. and drag the dimension down the wall. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. for Prefer. and click to place the dimension.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. 22 On the Basics tab. 20 Release SHIFT. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 .19 Release SHIFT. After you create the new family type. click Modify. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. and using the same methods. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise.

select CityBlueprint. for Tick Mark.dimension tick mark. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and select the lower dimension. text font. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. For Text Font. 5 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. Under Text. 2 Click (Properties). enter 3. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Office Standard. and click OK. for Text Size.2 mm. select Arrow 30 Degree. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan.

click Modify. click Modify. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. 7 On the Basics tab. select another font.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 9 In the Type Selector. and select the bottom dimension. 10 On the Basics tab. ■ Click OK twice. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard.

You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan.11 Using the same method. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. and how to add leaders to the text notes. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . “Creating Text Annotation” on page 230. create a new angular dimension type. select the angular dimension on the planter.

rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. click (None). but below the upper dimension string. for Leader. and click and drag to create a text box. click Text. 3 On the Options Bar. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 . zoom to planter near grid line 5.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

for Text Size. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 11 Under Text. and click OK. click Edit/New. under Graphics. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. select Arc Leaders. enter EXISTING BUILDING. click Duplicate. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Name dialog box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . enter 6 mm Arial Notes. click Modify. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 7 Select the text box. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan.5 In the text box. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 6 mm. If so.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 . click Text. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). and enter Planting Bed. click Modify.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Edit/New. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. In the Rename dialog. for Text font. for New. click Modify. for Leader Arrowhead. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. select Arrow 30 Degree. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. enter Standard Notes. 20 On the Design Bar. select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics. Under Text. Click Rename.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). and click OK. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. click Modify. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.

click Text. 27 On the Options Bar. click (Arc). over the Planting Bed text. select Text: Standard Notes. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. 26 In the Type Selector. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. click to place the text box. for Leader. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 .

Wall. and save the exercise file with a unique name.31 Click in the text box. and enter 457 mm Conc. 32 If you want to save your changes. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.

For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. and metal studs. These components display at the required scale. like a standard door header condition. 237 . The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model.Detailing 6 In this tutorial. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. plywood. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008.

Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you trace over the building model geometry. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you detail the roof overhang of a project building. which means that all detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and insulation objects. They are also view specific.rvt. add detail components. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. In order to detail from the building model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. After you add components. Detailing the View In this exercise. In the callout view. You load detail components. click Training Files. as well as detail lines. you detail the view of the roof edge. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. region objects. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

and click OK. click Duplicate. select As underlay. Detailing the View | 239 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 406. double-click the detail callout head. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail.5mm. 13 In the Name dialog. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 16 Click OK twice. 15 For Spacing. 5 In the alert dialog. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Detail Component. 8 Delete the component. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 17 In the drawing area. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click . and click Open. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Exact location is not important. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. The roof overhang detail displays. select Corrugated Metal. click Edit/New. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the drawing area. click Repeating Detail.

Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 23 On the Options Bar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click Load.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. click (Move). 19 On the Design Bar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. ■ Click Modify. and press DELETE. and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. 240 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. click Detail Component. 34 In the Type Selector.rvt. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. and place it in the detail view as shown. 25 In the Type Selector. click OK. click Training Files. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 31 In the Type Selector. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Training Files. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 32 To properly orient the component.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because you still have several components to load. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. and click Open. you load them as a group from a single file. Detailing the View | 241 . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.rfa.

select Chain. 39 Select the horizontal segment. click the Flip instance arrows. 242 | Chapter 6 Detailing .Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. and click Modify. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click Insulation. 36 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 38 Click Modify. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown.

43 Click Modify. For Offset. click Detail Component. select to near side. Detailing the View | 243 . as shown. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. and on the Edit toolbar. enter 140mm.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. click (Move). Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. 46 In the Type Selector. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. ■ Click Modify.

rvt. they are view specific. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm.48 In the Type Selector. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 4 Click Modify. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. select Thin Lines. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. 52 Click Modify. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Lines. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. meaning they display only in this view. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and lock the component. you add lines to your detail. Like detail components.

13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). as shown. select Thin Lines.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines. Adding Detail Lines | 245 . For Offset. enter 10mm. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. as shown. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. 11 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Type Selector. For Offset. 10 On the Design Bar.

15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). 18 In the Type Selector.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. draw the detail lines as shown. and draw the detail lines as shown. select Chain. 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing . select Thin Lines. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. as shown. and clear Chain.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. right-click.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. and press ENTER. 26 In the Type Selector. 24 On the View Control Bar. select the Penthouse level line. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). right-click Roof Overhang Detail. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and click OK. select Vapor Barrier. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click ➤ Hide Crop Region. 22 In the Project Browser. select Do not display. click Detail Lines. Adding Detail Lines | 247 . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. For Offset. When you turn the display model off. enter 10mm. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard.

select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it.29 On the Design Bar. click Text. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. “Adding Text Notes” on page 248. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Component. 248 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 30 In the Type Selector. 32 Click Modify. select M_Break Line. you add text notes to complete the detail. press SPACEBAR as necessary. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. for Text ➤ Suffix. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. and click (Properties). 6 Click Modify.. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Click again to specify the location of the text box. enter Typ.2 On the Options Bar. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. Adding Text Notes | 249 . click Dimension. 7 Select the dimension line. Enter the text. and click OK. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.

right-click. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. enter Roof Overhang Detail . clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. on the Options Bar.rvt. select a text note. and click OK. while pressing CTRL.Keynotes. 7 Click Modify. and click OK. (Filter Selection). 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and press DELETE. right-click. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. right-click. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. and selecting the chain. click Select All Instances. select all the coping linework. pressing TAB. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and save the exercise file. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. and click Rename. 250 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. “Creating Detail Components” on page 250. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

click Detail Component. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. While pressing SHIFT. for File name. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 15 Use a window to select all linework.Keynotes view is not the open view. click Load into Projects. select Medium Lines. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 21 To place the component. navigate to your preferred location. select the coping. double-click it in the Project Browser. and click Open. clear Detail Items. click . in the Type Selector. and click Save. 16 Click Modify. and click OK. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. 14 Click Modify. enter Roof Edge. Creating Detail Components | 251 . 18 In the Save As dialog. The original linework remains selected. click Training Files. 23 Using a window. 22 Click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. and the component can be placed in the detail. 25 In the Filter dialog. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.

navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. you place keynotes on objects. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the alert dialog. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 In the drawing area. click Training Files. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Click to place the leader arm. 63mm Rigid Insulation.B5. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. click Load. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. delete the underlying linework. In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. and click Open.26 Press DELETE.rfa.rfa. click Detail Component. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Adding Keynotes” on page 252. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. and click Open. 27 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 31 Using the same method used previously. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 28 On the Options Bar.

For the metal coping. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. use keynote 06160.D11. click in the Value column. 12 On the Design Bar. For the 50 x 150. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). Roof Edge4. click Keynote ➤ Element. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. use keynote 07645. FasciaProfile_1. Adding Keynotes | 253 .F1. For the 50 x 200. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. use keynote 06110. 19mm Plywood.D1. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. use keynote 09250. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.F1. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. use keynote 06110.G1. 6 Click Modify. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. navigate to 07645. use keynote 06160.C1.D11. use keynote 06110.I1.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. select the metal fascia with drip edge. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 11 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New.

4 In the Type Selector. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 5 In the drawing area. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and select the right end point. You do this in order to keynote the component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 8 In the Save As dialog. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. select Medium Lines. click Load into Projects. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 22mm Corrugated Steel . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Modify. 15 In the Type Selector.rvt. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. and click Open. select Corrugated Metal. click Detail Component. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254. and click Save. 6 Lock the line.A8. navigate to your preferred location. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. select the left end point of the reference line. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Lines. 9 On the Design Bar. 17 Keynote the component.rft. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. using keynote 07460. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.14 On the Design Bar. 18 Save the file. for File name.20 Ga. click Training Files. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 37 Click OK 3 times. click Duplicate. 30 Click Modify. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Type Properties dialog.11 Press DELETE. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . 25 Next. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 15 Click Modify. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Detail Component. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Name dialog. select m_Light Line Detail Component. click Training Files. and click OK. You add the components to the project and keynote them. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click Detail Component. click Load. 22 On the Options Bar. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. and click . Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 20 Click OK 3 times. 31 Select the component. click in the Value column. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Edit/New. 28 In the Type Selector. 34 In the Name dialog. click Detail Component. enter EPDM Membrane. click Duplicate. 27 On the Design Bar. invisible. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. select Medium Line Detail Component. 16 Select the component. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. and click (Properties). 29 In the drawing area.A1. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. and hidden) used in the view. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click the end points at the top of the roof.

on the Edit toolbar. select Chain.A5. and assign it keynote 07260. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 41 Select the component just added. (Move). 52 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. and assign it keynote 06110.G1. click Detail Component. 47 Select the component. 46 Click Modify. 42 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. 49 With the component selected.38 On the Design Bar. name the component Air Barrier. 53 On the Options Bar. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. and click . 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 48 Using the same method used previously. and click . and click the lower end at the break line. against the 3/4" plywood. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 44 On the Design Bar. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 40 Click Modify. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component.

56 Delete both dashed detail lines. and click . Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 .A4. leaving the detail component lines. and Vapor Barrier. 58 Using the method used previously. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 61 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Element. 50 x 200 Framing. name the component Vapor Barrier. and assign it keynote 07260. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. Air Barrier.55 Click Modify. 60 On the Design Bar.

3 In the text editor. and press TAB. and close the text editor.A4.. select Invisible Lines. click Detail Component. and click .rvt.txt.A1. 70 In the drawing area. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 67 In the drawing area. add a keynote for the component. Enter 07460. and press TAB. click Load into Projects. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.rfa. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 63 In the drawing area. select the component. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 71 Save the file. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. name the component Batt Insul. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. in the Type Selector. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 68 Select the component. click File menu ➤ Save. and assign it keynote 07210. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.A9. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. The database file opens in a text editor. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric.rfa. 69 Using the method used previously. Enter 07463.

select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. navigate to 07463. under Keynote Table. and click Open. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. These details do not update with changes to the building model. click to place the leader. click Keynote ➤ Element. select all the keynotes. and click to place the note. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 . and click OK. 11 Click Modify. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. click Browse. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 13 Click Modify. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. 14 Save the file. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). In the Type Selector.txt. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. After you create a drafting view. select Absolute. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. and click OK. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. you learn how to create a drafted detail. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. under Path Type. 9 In the drawing area. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar.A1.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. enter EPDM Metal Coping. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. The detail that you import is in DWG format. 3 On the Options Bar. select 1 : 5. right-click Drafting 1. for Scale. 7 In the Rename View dialog. select Black and white. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. The detail is imported as an import symbol. 6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. select Reference other view.dwg. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. For Layer/Level Colors. select Center-to-center. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. Click Open.rvt. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. and click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and click OK.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. click Callout.rvt. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Rename dialog.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping.No Reference. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. click Modify. and click Properties. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. click Edit/New. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and double-click the callout. enter Detail . delete the existing value. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. click Rename. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 5 Click Modify. 12 Click OK twice. and click OK. Creating a Reference Callout | 261 . for New. 6 Select the callout.

and click OK.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser./Det. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 18 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product./Sect.No Reference). 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing . enter Header @ Sliding Door. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.Elev. double-click A105 . “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. The callout is updated with the sheet information. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. for Name. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.rvt. 3 On the View Control Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail.

8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.5mm. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . for Name. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. 5 In the Type Selector. click Filled Region. 14 Click OK 3 times. click Detail Component. click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Selector. select Gypsum-Plaster. enter Gyp.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. . 11 In the Name dialog. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select the width dimension. Draw a rectangle as shown. click Region Properties. 16 Select the left edge of the region. select Wide Lines. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click . Board. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 18 While pressing CTRL. and enter 20. and click OK. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Duplicate. 17 Click Modify. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.

Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). click Finish Sketch. 24 Select the mirrored region. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. Move the cursor up. 264 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.20 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click 22 On the Options Bar. (Draw).

Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. select Wood . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the right edge of the wood region. click Edit/New. Draw a rectangle as shown. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 .25 Click Modify. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. in the Type Selector. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. for Name. click . click Duplicate. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 30 In the Name dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.Finish. click Filled Region. click (Align). verify that the thickness is 19mm. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. and click OK. . 37 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties.Finish. 33 Click OK 3 times. select Medium Lines. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. enter Wood . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar.

verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 42 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.5mm. sketch the new region as shown. click (Align). 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 46 On the Tools toolbar.38 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick). click . 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. enter 6mm. and press ENTER. 40 On the Options Bar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. For Offset. click Ref Plane. click Finish Sketch. click Filled Region.

51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and press ENTER. click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw). and press ENTER. For Offset. and click to select the point.47 Click the reference plane. and click to select the point. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and select the bottom horizontal line. 48 Click Modify. Move the cursor down 305mm. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. Move the cursor left 25mm. enter 10mm. 56 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor right 25mm. click (Trim/Extend). 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . and click to select the point. Select Chain. enter 0.

63 Repeat for the right detail line. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 65 On the Options Bar. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and right edges of the door panel region. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. click Detail Lines. For Offset. 62 Select the left detail line. enter 3mm. 58 In the Type Selector. and click Open. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 76. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. select the height dimension. and press ENTER. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. top. click Load. click Training Files. click Detail Component. 60 Select the left.2mm. select Medium Lines.rfa. 61 Click Modify. and press ENTER.

click Detail Component.TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 70 On the Design Bar. 76 In the Type Selector. 71 On the Options Bar. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 69 Select the bolt. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Wide Lines. click Load. click Detail Lines. 74 Select the expansion bolt. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 . 68 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. use the images as a guide. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. click Training Files.rfa. and click Open. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 80 On the Options Bar. 84 On the Design Bar. click . click . 82 Select the rectangle. and on the Edit toolbar. (Mirror). 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing . select Thin Lines.78 On the Design Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 89 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. as shown. 90 In the Type Selector. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 .87 Click Modify.

97 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). and press ENTER. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. select the length dimension. 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and click to place the arc as shown. click Detail Lines. enter 3mm. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 94 Select the mirrored line on the right. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. click . and on the Edit toolbar.92 Select the line. 95 On the Design Bar.

Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. select M_Break Line. 105 In the drawing area. click Dimension. 106 Click to place the dimension. 102 In the Type Selector.99 Click Modify. 103 Add two break lines as shown. and click Modify. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 101 On the Design Bar. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Detail Component. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 .

112 In the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. click to create an arced leader. and click Modify. click Text. 108 In the Type Selector. 110 Select the dimension line. 114 Enter Gyp. using the Drag Text grip. and click Modify. click Dimension. 115 Select the note.107 On the Design Bar. select the gypsum board region on the left. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 113 In the drawing area.5mm Arial. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar. and click to place the text. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. Board. drag the text for the smaller dimension.

119 Save the file. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 . 118 On the Design Bar.117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. click Modify to end the command.

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 .Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial. including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.

Finishing-Sheets. click Training Files. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.Using Note Blocks In this lesson. enter 1. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click East. 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 5 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar.Hexagon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.rvt. for Number of Leaders. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. click Symbol. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote .

on the Options Bar. and click OK. and click above the tag to place a copy. click (Copy). under Identity Data. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Select the tag.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. click (Properties). 12 On the Edit toolbar. Creating a Note Block | 279 . enter Seal existing doors and insulate. for Text.

15 For Text. 20 Select the tag on the left. 17 Click OK.14 With the copy selected. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. enter B. clear Copy. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. click (Properties). 16 For Tag. and click. and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and on the Options Bar. 19 On the toolbar. enter Repair existing door surround. click (Mirror). on the Options Bar.

Repair as required. and moving counter-clockwise. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Saw cut existing brick wall. using the table as a reference. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 22 Optionally. Create. Repair existing door surround. Remove all existing windows. click Modify. select Tag. Creating a Note Block | 281 . Clean exterior brick wall. for Sort by. enter Exterior Construction Notes. and click Add. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. for Note block name. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. and click OK. Select Text. under Available fields. select Tag. Tuckpoint as required.21 On the Design Bar. and click Add. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. Clean cut and repair wall as required. format. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.

26 Click OK. select Exterior Construction Notes. 29 In the Project Browser. enter Mark. select Center.Elevations. click Modify. expand Sheets (all). enter Description. 28 In the Project Browser. For Header text. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. expand Schedules/Quantities. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and click Save.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. verify Arial in the first field. 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. 31 On the Design Bar. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 27 In the column header (text). 282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . enter 6 mm in the second field. and drag it to the sheet. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. and double-click A103 .rvt. On the Appearance tab. and for Alignment. for Heading. and select Bold.

select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the second field. and drag it to the sheet. enter T. 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet. under Sheets (all).rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. double-click T . The drawing list displays. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. ■ 4 Click OK. Select Sheet Name. Using Drawing Lists | 283 . On the Filter tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. and in the third field. for Filter by. select does not equal. for Sort by. 7 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. 5 In the list title field. 2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). under Available fields. and click Add. enter Sheet Index. double-click T . 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. in the first field. and click Add.

windows. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. and door frames. 9 On the Design Bar. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. and click OK. enter Typical Symbol Legend. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. On construction documents. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. On construction documents. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Finally. doors. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them.rvt. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. click New ➤ Legend. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. door frame schedule. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and so on).8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. for Name. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule.

for Name. click . You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 13 Working from the top down. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 . click Edit/New. enter 3mm.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . click Text. and click OK twice. 10 For Text Size. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. click Symbol. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Legend Text. 9 For Text Font. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Duplicate.Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view.Filled Level Head . select Arial. you create a text type with the necessary size. and click OK. Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Options bar.

click Typical Symbol Legend. click Typical Symbol Legend. 19 In the Project Browser.Unit 18. 16 In the Type Selector. 286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and click to place it.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and double-click A101 . drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. expand Legends. 17 On the Design Bar. under Sheets. double-click A102 . and click to place it. click Modify. 15 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. select Viewport : No Titlemark.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet.

3 For Scale. click New ➤ Legend. For View. and press ENTER. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 21 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. select1 : 50. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. for Name. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. select Viewport : No Titlemark. click Modify. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.rvt. and click OK. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Medium for Detail Level.20 In the Type Selector. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 6 On the View Control Bar. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. click Legend Component. For Host length. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. enter 900 mm. select Section. Creating a Component Legend | 287 .

and on the Options Bar. for Family. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click Text. click Modify. 12 In the Type Selector.9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the second wall. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.

Creating a Component Legend | 289 . for Leader. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.13 On the Options Bar. click to add text with a single-segment leader. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 19 Enter the following text.

The open drawings are both visible. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. drag it onto the sheet. click Modify to end the command. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. select 4th Floor Wall Types. and drag it to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. 29 In the project Browser. 25 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans. 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and click New Sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 23 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all). allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. under Legends.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. select Level 4.

32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. 33 In the floor plan view. click (Match Type).Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. select the Wall Type 2 component. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. Creating a Component Legend | 291 .

You can create a sequence of revisions. contractor inquiries. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. 36 On the View Control Bar.35 Select the patio divider wall. 292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . select Medium for Detail Level. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 37 Optionally. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. These changes can be due to owner requests.

the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. In general. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Using the table. When you use this option. enter a date. If you select By Sheet. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. or changes in building material availability. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. In this exercise. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. 3 In the Revisions dialog. For example. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. In most instances. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. double-click Level 4. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. yet as concise as possible. If Visible is not selected. 2 On the Settings menu. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. click Revisions. 5 For Description. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 . the revision is locked and issued to the field. if the active revision is number 1. When Issued is selected. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected.rvt. 7 Under Visible. under Floor Plans.

2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.rvt. 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 4 On the Edit toolbar. you make changes to the project floor plan. move the cursor up.8 Click OK. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. including revision number and revision date. click (Move). double-click Level 4. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. under Floor Plans. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select the partition. 3 Select the divider.

click Finish Sketch. click Revision Cloud. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 .6 On the Design Bar. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Modify. click near the partition you moved. 8 In the drawing area. 11 On the Design Bar. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.

Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. double-click Level 4. select 6. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click OK. under Floor Plans.rvt. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. for Line Weight. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Tag ➤ By Category. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. you load a revision tag into the project. click the Annotation Objects tab. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud.

and because the revision is the first in the project. Because you chose to number by project. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 5 In the Tags dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. you create a sheet view in your project. 10 In the drawing area. you prevent further changes to the revision. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed.rvt. double-click A107 . Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. In the Tags dialog. click Tags. the cloud is tagged as number 1. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. click OK. Working with Revisions In this exercise. select Leader. You do this by issuing the revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. on which you place a revised view. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. under Sheets. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Working with Revisions | 297 . 6 Click Load.rfa. scroll down to Revision Clouds. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 11 Click to place the tag. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.4 On the Options Bar. you need to add one.Unnamed. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 8 In the Tags dialog. You then issue a revision. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud.

under Add. On the Settings menu. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. click Revisions. select Issued. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. for Visible. You can continue to add revisions. you can no longer modify it. 6 In the Revisions dialog. select None for each issued revision. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. NOTE After you issue a revision. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. and click OK. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. click New. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. click Revisions.

Importing Image Files In this exercise. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.9 Click OK. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.JPG. and spreadsheets.Title Sheet. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.rvt. click Training Files. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. such as images. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . under Sheets. text. into a project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you learn to import information from other applications. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and place it on a sheet. Importing from Other Applications | 299 .

6 Select the text. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet.rvt. click Modify. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.doc text file in another window.5 On the Design Bar. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T . for Leader. 3 On the Options Bar. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to add text without a leader. under Sheets. click Text.

and saved as Fixture Schedule.JPG. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 10 On the Design Bar. with the new text box still selected.JPG.xls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.mdi. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 . 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Sheets. This process may vary from system to system. 3 In Microsoft Excel. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. enter Fixture Schedule. for Name. 5 Click OK. for File name. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. This exercise demonstrates a common method. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. click Modify. select the document writer. click File menu ➤ Print. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. and click Save. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. This step has been completed for you.rvt. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Desktop. double-click A102 . click Training Files. 4 Under Printer. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet.Unit 18. click Modify.

302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .12 Click File menu ➤ Save.

To effectively document this project. The large floor plan. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. called dependent views. as well as a large lab building.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial. 303 . or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you break up the plan into sections. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

| 305 .

Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. 4 In the Rename View dialog.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the drawing area. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. under Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Dependent on Level 2. select the crop region. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Level 2 . The dependent view opens. double-click Level 2. 5 Click in the drawing area. for Name. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. 306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. right-click Level 2.Aviary. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. and click Rename.

The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. and the model crop is the interior crop region. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 . 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.

and on the Zoom flyout. and click Rename. click (Hide Crop Region). 15 Select the crop region. 14 Click in the drawing area. and click OK. click Zoom To Fit. for Name. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).Labs. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Zoom flyout. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter Level 2 . 13 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 2. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 12 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit.9 On the View Control Bar. 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

under Floor Plans. click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. 18 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). click Modify. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 20 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 .17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 19 On the View Control Bar.

(Align with the second column of lab cubicles. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. Click above the left corner of the lab building. click Finish Sketch. 24 On the Design Bar.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

for Line Weight. 27 Under Matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 . select Double Dash. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. and click OK.Aviary. expand Sheets. select 9. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. for Name. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 31 In the Project Browser. right-click A101 .Unnamed. click OK to accept the default titleblock. enter Level 2 Aviary. and click Rename. 33 In the Project Browser. 28 For Line Pattern. under Floor Plans. and drag it onto the sheet. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. click Level 2 .

40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. for Target view.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . and place the Level 2 . Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. click View Reference.35 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 39 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.Aviary is selected.

under Floor Plans.Aviary. click (Show Crop Region). 45 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. click Modify.Labs. 44 On the Design Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. double-click Level 2 . select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 47 On the View Control Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 .The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. for Target view. 46 In the Project Browser. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. click the far right control. after modifying the annotation crop region. 49 If.48 Select the crop region. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . right-click. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.

51 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. click Zoom To Fit. and click Apply Dependent Views. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 . select all views in the list. expand Level 1. and click OK. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. click (Hide Crop Region). but are not placed on sheets. right-click Level 2. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 57 On the Zoom flyout. 53 In the Select Views dialog. 55 On the Zoom flyout. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. 54 In the Project Browser.

3 In the Project Browser. The dependent view opens.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser.Left.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . expand South Elevation. and click Rename. select the Crop Region. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click South Elevation. 5 In the drawing area. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The matchline is already placed in the view. enter South Elevation . In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. right-click South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 4 In the Rename View dialog.

and drag it toward the center of the drawing. cropping the view to the lab building. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. click (Hide Crop Region). 8 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. cropping the view to the aviary. and click OK. and click OK. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 . enter South Elevation. under Sheets. 11 Select the crop region. right-click South Elevation.Right. and drag it toward the center of the view. for Name. for Name.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. and click Rename. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click (Hide Crop Region). enter South Elevation . 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. right-click A103 Unnamed. 7 On the View Control Bar. click OK to accept the default titleblock. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 13 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. 16 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. click South Elevation . under Elevations. under Elevations. for Target view. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.Right. 20 In the Project Browser. click View Reference. double-click South Elevation. 25 On the Options Bar. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Project Browser.18 In the Project Browser.Left. and drag it onto the sheet. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. and drag it onto the sheet. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. click South Elevation . under Elevations.Left is selected.

for Target view. click Modify. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.28 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all).South Elevation. double-click A103 . Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 .Right. 31 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: South Elevation . 30 On the Design Bar.

and click Activate View. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Select the crop region.NOTE If the view references are not visible. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Right-click the view.

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

you learn to create and customize views of building information models. More specifically. how to control fill pattern colors.Viewing 9 In this tutorial. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. 323 . You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views.

locate the Project Browser. click . A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. expand Views (all). 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. and three-dimensional (3D) views. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. including elevation and three-dimensional views. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You create elevations. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. you learn how to access different views of the building model. sections. and double-click East.rvt. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. on the Standard toolbar. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. expand Elevations. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area.

This change is applied only to the active view. click the Annotation Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. the east elevation. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. 7 Click OK. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. Exploring the Building Model | 325 . The default name of the view is {3D}. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. click Model Graphics Style. click . Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. and click Hidden Line. scroll down and clear Window Tags. 6 Under Visibility. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. This change is applied only in this elevation view.

You can pan. 16 In the Rename View dialog. click to reorient the view.9 On the View toolbar. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. and expand 3D Views. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. expand Views (all). and click OK. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. and click Rename. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. zoom. The view follows the movement of the cursor. . Move the mouse to pan the view. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. click X to close the view. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. right-click {3D}. 18 In the Project Browser. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. enter My 3D View. double-click My 3D View. under 3D Views. .

Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. click Camera. and double-click Level 1. After you specify the second point (the view target). expand Views (all). 19 Proceed to the next exercise.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. and click View. right-click in the Design Bar. Cameras define the eye point. m_Viewing_Exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327. and distance from the target. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. outside of the dimension lines. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . eye height. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. as shown in the following illustration.

and sideways to see how the view changes. Move the cursor up. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Press and hold the left mouse button.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. Press and hold the left mouse button. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. click Dynamically Modify View. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. down. 5 On the View menu. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.

Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 . Four views of the model display in the drawing area. height. Change the camera position. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. 13 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. click Tile.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Press and hold the left mouse button. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. and target 12 On the Window menu.

and click Show Camera. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View 1.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 16 In the Project Browser. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. under 3D Views. double-click Level 1. 330 | Chapter 9 Viewing . right-click 3D View 1.

TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. and click Shading. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. click to create a new 3D view. under Camera. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. right-click. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. 20 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. Click OK.17 In My 3D View. and move it to another location. click Model Graphics Style.

as shown in the following illustration. 24 Click the section box. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing . A section box is displayed around the model. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. under Extents. A rotation tool is also displayed.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. select Section Box. click View Properties. 22 On the View menu. and click OK.

Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. Creating a Section View | 333 . double-click Level 1. and rotate the section box around the model. click Section. Creating a Section View In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. and maximize this view.rvt. m_Viewing_Exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating a Section View” on page 333. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing . or in the Project Browser.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. and click Find Referring Views. double-click the section head. select the section view. 8 Select the section line. select Floor Plan: Level 1. expand Sections. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. 6 In the Project Browser. click Modify. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. right-click. View the section 5 To view the section. 7 In the Go To View dialog. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. and click Open View. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. and double-click Section 1.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. Creating Elevation Views | 335 . You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the section line. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. move the cursor around the building model. Notice the change in the view direction. under Floor Plans. click Modify. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. m_Viewing_Exercise. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. 14 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. click Modify. double-click Level 1. click Elevation. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view.9 On the Design Bar. Notice the change in section depth.rvt.

The elevation is named Elevation 1 . indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. and click. 10 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol.b. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Elevation 1 . double-click Level 1. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow.a. Do not select the arrow. 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes.b. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. Elevation 1 . under Elevations. zoom in. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. click Modify.a by default. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. Elevation 1 .

where each layer is assigned a different material. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and applies to phasing override materials as well. and the insulation color to pink. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and other families.rvt. For example. click Training Files. in this case. on the File menu. a shade of gray. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. In the left pane of the Open dialog. floors. in a compound wall. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. roofs. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. such as the one below. such as Brick on CMU. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. click Save As. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type.11 If you want to save your changes. In addition. This includes walls. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. and open Common\c_Showroom.

A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and double-click Wall/Floor Join . Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red.Level 3. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser.Brick for Name. expand Views (all). 3 In the Materials dialog. expand Views (all).Brick for Name.Filled). View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Settings menu. and click OK twice. expand 3D Views. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. 9 In the Materials dialog. select Masonry . 5 In the Color dialog. select red. expand Sections (Section Head . click Materials. click Color. 4 Under Cut Pattern. The surface pattern of the brick is black. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. click Materials. and double-click 3D. select Masonry .

c_Showroom. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View menu. click View Properties. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise.10 Under Surface Pattern.rvt. 11 In the Color dialog. select white. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. and click OK twice. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 . click Color. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. expand Views (all). 12 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans.

the plan regions cannot overlap each other. right-click. double-click Level 2. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. and click OK three times. and click Element Properties. select a shade of gray. If you create more than one plan region in a file. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click Save As.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. click Detail Level. click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Fine. 7 In the Color dialog. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. By default. 12 On the View Control Bar. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 On the Design Bar. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 If you want to save your changes. select Solid fill for Name. click Modify. . on the File menu.

If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. line color. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan.coincident edges.rvt. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. and you cannot control their visibility. line type. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. or pattern. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. refer to the online Help for more information. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. and the view depth plane. Plan regions have a single property. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. right-click in the Design Bar. the top and bottom clip planes. click Lines. and double-click Level 1. 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and click View. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand Floor Plans. which is similar to the view range for plan views. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. In the following illustration. expand Views (all). Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. the south elevation is also displayed. view range. 3 In the Level 1 view. click Plan Region. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. On the Options Bar. click . sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar.

When you select the plan region. click Finish Sketch. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click Apply. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. under Extents. top and bottom clip planes. and click Element Properties. click Edit for View Range. and then click OK twice. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. click Modify. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 In the View Range dialog. By selecting Parent View’s Level. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. The plan region displays as a dashed green line.■ ■ On the Design Bar. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . right-click. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. Press ESC to end the command. the line turns red. 4 Select the plan region.

The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. on the File menu. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 344 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 10 If you want to save your changes. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views. to place and render decals to create signs. and posters. billboards. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. 345 . and to create walkthroughs of your building information model.

you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. and create the perspective view that you want to render. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. In this exercise. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. you select a scene that defines the model environment. When you complete these changes. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. After you create the perspective view. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. the floor.

3 On the Options Bar. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click . right-click in the Design Bar. and click Edit/New.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. click Materials.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . select Masonry . and open Metric\m_Cohouse. click Edit for Structure. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. under Name. 8 In the Materials dialog.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. and click the tab in the context menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Cavity Wall .Brick. click Wall. click Training Files. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 . 9 Under AccuRender. verify that Co-house .Brick. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu.

select Site . 25 Under Name. expand Metals.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 22 In the New Material dialog. for Layer 2. and click . select Polished. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 26 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. 14 On the Options Bar. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. under _accurender. 21 In the Materials dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. under Name. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. under Construction.200mm. under _accurender.Asphalt. click Modify. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Materials dialog. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 23 Under AccuRender. and click Aluminum. 19 Click OK four times. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. expand Masonry and click Brick. Polished and click OK. 11 Under Name.Running. under Name. click Materials. 12 Click OK twice. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit for Structure.Plain. 24 In the Material Library. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Aluminum. 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Edit/New. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. . select Carib.

select the curtain wall mullion again. 33 Click OK three times. floor. click . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 . and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. verify that New is selected. under Name. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. select Exterior under Type. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. click Region Raytrace. 32 In the Materials dialog. 29 On the Options Bar. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. and click OK.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. under Materials and Finishes. select Aluminum. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. and then click . Polished. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Material field. click Edit/New. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. click No.

In a later exercise. expand Views (all). “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350. m_Cohouse. Cnst. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). producing a photorealistic effect. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. 350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click 1st Flr. floor. 38 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. when you render an exterior view of the model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you place two different types of trees on the building site.rvt.

4 In the Type Selector.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum .9 Meters. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. 7 In the Type Selector. select any of the deciduous trees. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 . right-click in the Design Bar. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. click Site Component. Create a new type of tree. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. and click Site. and click to place a tree. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and click . click Modify.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. select M_Tree .

under Identity Data. under accurender. Black. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. 13 Under Name. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. and place two black oak trees. and click OK twice. and then click display the Plant Library. under Other. enter Black Oak. 352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown in the following illustration. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. click in the Value field for Plant Name.rvt.8 In the Element Properties dialog. select Oak. and click OK. expand Trees and Shrubs. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. and click Deciduous. select Black Oak for Type Comments. 12 In the Plant Library. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog. 15 Under Other.

click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. Cnst. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. Creating a Perspective View | 353 . view open. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. on the View tab of the Design Bar. The new perspective view is displayed.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr.

and click Show Camera. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. expand 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). view. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. 354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Cnst.

and click OK. lighting. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. place. right-click 3D View 1. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. double-click Exterior. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 .7 In the Project Browser. and environment settings that you use to render the view. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Rename. you select a scene and specify time.rvt. enter Exterior. date. m_Cohouse.

Time. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 6 Select By Date. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 7 Under Date. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. and click Sun. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. click Settings. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 8 Under Time. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. under Scene Settings. click the Solar Angles tab. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

12 Click the Settings Tab. 11 Scroll down. select Grass. select Ground Plane. 10 Click in the Cities list. click Capture Rendering. click . under Background Color. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene.00 (many clouds. under Scene Settings. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. select Good for Quality. Rye. 21 Click OK twice.) 14 Click OK. and click OK. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . click Raytrace. 19 In the Material Library. click No. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Environment dialog. click Environment. and enter bo. 13 Enter . and click OK. select Autumn for Plant Season. USA. Dark. under Scene Settings. MA. click Image Size. 18 Click Material. The Ground Plane tab displays. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.20 for Cloudiness. under _accurender. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. 20 In the Name list. 27 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 17 Under Advanced.9 Click the Place tab. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. and select Boston. click Site.

m_Cohouse. expand Renderings. define the view and render scene settings. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. and double-click 2nd Flr. 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Cnst. To create the rendered scene. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 32 If you want to save this exercise. Adding RPC People In this exercise.rvt. click Save As. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. expand Floor Plans. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. and finally. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name.30 On the Design Bar. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.

6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). click Component. Adding RPC People | 359 . select Rotate after placement.2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 7 Repeat steps 4 .

360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Camera. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.rvt. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360.8 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Cohouse. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.

The interior perspective is displayed. double-click 2nd Flr.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Cnst. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 . 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view.

Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. and click Rename. and click OK. enter 178 mm for Height. under Size. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. right-click 3D View 1. click the dimensions for Size. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. 362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter 229 mm for Width.

11 On the View menu. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. and click OK. click Modify. and select the section box. under Extents.9 In the Rename View dialog. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. click to display the 3D view of the building model. enter Interior. A section box is displayed around the building model. and click OK. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 . Grips are displayed on the section box. 14 On the Design Bar. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. 12 On the View menu. select Section Box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties.

364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. 4 Under Type. 13 Click the Settings tab. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. and click Sun. Time. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. 17 In the Environment dialog. under Scene Settings. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. under 3D Views. and enter bo. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. MA. on the Main tab.rvt. select New. you reduce the rendering time. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 14 Click Save. 9 Under Time. 11 Click in the Cities list. place. 12 Scroll down. m_Cohouse. USA. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Interior. click Settings. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. under Background Color. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. and select Boston. and click OK. click the Solar Angles tab. 10 Click the Place tab. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. By limiting the geometry. and environment settings used to render the view. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Under Date. click Environment. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. under Scene Settings. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. you create a render scene to specify the time. and click Save. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. and enter Interior Scene for Name. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. click OK. date. 7 Select By Date.

Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 . you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. 21 In the Name list. Dark. 19 Click Material. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365. under accurender. select Ground Plane. double-click Interior. click Radiate. 5 On the Design Bar. 24 Under Scene Settings. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. as daylight sources. select Summer for Plant Season. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. The Ground Plane tab displays. click OK. such as windows and doors. 20 In the Material Library. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. select Grass. Curtain Wall 1). Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. 22 Click OK twice. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. click Site. You can select families with transparent materials. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed.18 Under Advanced. double-click {3D}. select {3D}. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Rye.rvt. click Daylights. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. under 3D Views. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse. under Use View’s Section Box.

the following rendered view is displayed. 9 If you want to save your changes. When radiate completes. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 10 Close the exercise file. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. which can take several minutes. click Raytrace. begins. on the File menu. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. . click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name.The radiosity process.

NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The walkthrough path is a spline. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. and open Common\c_Townhouse.rvt. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. and change unit formats as desired. click Settings ➤ Project Units. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. If you prefer to use Metric values. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. or section view. and ends in the far corner of the living room. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. elevation. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. but you can also define it in a 3D. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 . In a plan view. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. proceeds through the dining room. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. you must select or define a scene. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. click Training Files.

5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. expand Walkthroughs. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. on the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. of the walkthrough. and click to specify the start point. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and click the tab in the context menu. right-click in the Design Bar. and double-click Walkthrough 1. 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all).Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1st Floor. click . expand Floor Plans. click Walkthrough. or the first key frame. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.

select the crop boundary. and select the crop boundary. verify Field of view is selected. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 12 On the View menu. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. If it is not. 14 Click .The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 11 Under Change. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). click Edit Walkthrough. and click OK. Creating a Walkthrough | 369 .

15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. double-click 1st Floor. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. click . proceed to the next exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. and click OK. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. c_Townhouse. click Edit Walkthrough. under Extents. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 16 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough plays. 17 Click . clear Far Clip Active. 2 On the Options Bar. enter 1 for Frame. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. press ESC. 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. and click OK. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . 6 On the Options Bar. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. select Path for Controls. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. You can move any camera target or key frame position.

c_Townhouse. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.7 Click the third key frame position.rvt. 3 Under Output Length. 4 Under Format. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. shaded. If you are unsure of what option to use. specify 15 for Frames per Second. and click OK. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372. and then click to play the walkthrough. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. The AVI is recorded. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. hidden line. 2 In the Save As dialog. click Edit Walkthrough. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. select <Shading> for Display mode. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. shaded with edges. or with AccuRender raytracing. under Walkthroughs. double-click Walkthrough 1. When you export the walkthrough. and click Save. 1 On the File menu. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.

If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 8 If you want to save this exercise.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. and save the exercise file with a unique name. specifying the number of frames. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. on the File menu. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 . reducing the size of the image. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height.

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. More specifically. In this tutorial. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. 375 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View In this exercise. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. A 3D view is created. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.rvt.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. as shown. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. and double-click 01 Entry. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Solar Study . 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. click Camera. expand Views (all).

expand 3D Views. if necessary. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click to reorient the view. and click OK. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377.4 On the View toolbar. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. 10 On the File menu. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study . you create a section cutaway view. right-click 3D View 1. as shown. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 . and click Rename. click Modify.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise.Courtyard View.

8 In the Rename View dialog. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. to reorient the view. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 7 In the Project Browser. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. double-click the section head. and click OK. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. right-click Section 1.3 On the Design Bar. click . 6 To view the section. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . expand Sections. click Modify. and click Rename. 5 On the Design Bar. click Section. click 10 On the View toolbar.

14 In the Project Browser. click Callout. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you create a plan cutaway view. 15 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. On the Annotation Categories tab. click Save. then select Medium. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 On the View Control Bar. and under Orient to a View. right-click {3D}. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. do not display many elements in 3D. Typical plan views. as shown. and click OK. and click Rename. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. including the house. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. under Floor Plans. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . clear Section Boxes. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. In some cases. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. to expand the dialog. as shown. 18 On the File menu. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. click Modify. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. under 3D Views. then Fine. 17 To hide the section box. double-click 01 Entry.

right-click Callout of 01 Entry. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. and click Rename. 5 In the Project Browser. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. double-click Callout of 01 Entry.4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. as shown. as shown. to reorient the view. click . 11 On the Design Bar. click 8 On the View toolbar. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Modify. and click OK. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. and under Orient to a View.

20 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the File menu. 18 In the Project Browser.15 Select the Roof. under 3D Views.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. right-click {3D}. under 3D Views. and click OK. click Save. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. so you can see into the building from the top. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 . and click Rename. 16 On the View Control Bar.

For this study. 10 Under Place. and double-click Solar Study . and click OK. . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. For the Single-Day solar study. and time range. USA is selected. expand 3D Views. and click OK. enter Summer Solstice. Los Angeles. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. For the Multi-Day solar study. or multi-day solar study.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. date range. leave the slider at 50. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. you specify the location. and time. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. You can create a still. USA. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. for City. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. select Los Angeles.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. Click the Single-Day tab. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. CA. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Creating Solar Studies . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. click . 3 Select Cast Shadows.Boston. 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you specify the location. MA. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. expand Views (all). click . single-day. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 9 In the Name dialog.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson.Courtyard View. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. and click Duplicate. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. 2 On the View Control Bar. date. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 2006. and click OK. . and click OK.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. 8 On the Options Bar. 14 In this case. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click Save. 2006. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Duplicate. 6 On the View Control Bar. click . click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. enter 10 and press ENTER. select June 22. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . for Date. and click OK. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . on the Single-Day tab. select Winter Solstice. confirm that Summer Solstice. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Courtyard View is currently displayed. Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. Under Frame.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. click . enter 20 and press ENTER. click OK. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Los Angeles is selected. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Time Range. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. click . 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 2 On the View Control Bar. enter Winter Solstice. select December 22. Los Angeles. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 19 On the File menu. under Frame. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. 16 In the Name dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. click OK. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. ■ For Time Interval. click To display the next key frame.

click To play the animation from start to finish.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. select Summer Solstice. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. click . Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles. under Floor Plans. Click and enter Dining. 13 On the View Control Bar. click Text. . AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. 14 On the Options Bar. Click outside of the text box to end the command. double-click 01 Entry. and click OK. approximately as shown. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click OK.■ To display the next sequential frame. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click . Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click . The solar study animation plays. under Sun and Shadows Settings. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. approximately as shown. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. on the Single-Day tab.

and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click . click Lines. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. select Summer Solstice. select Section Boxes. expand 3D Views. on the Single-Day tab. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. click . On the Annotation Categories tab. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 11 To display the section box. 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK. as shown. click OK. and click OK. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . On the Options Bar.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. Los Angeles. as shown. 6 On the View Control Bar.

and click OK. To maintain the proportions of the frame. as shown. for Model Graphics Style. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. verify that Hidden Line is selected. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. select the section box. For File name. select Frame range. clear Section Boxes. 15 To hide the section box. 14 Click outside of the section box. Under Format. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. verify that the value is set to 15. select AVI Files. enter 450 in the first field (width).12 In the drawing area. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Under Output Length. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. On the Annotation Categories tab. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. For Save as type. and enter 5 to 50. For Dimensions. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway .Los Angeles. if necessary. For Frames per second.

as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 . on the Single-Day tab. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. and click OK. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . To view the animation. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. depending on the Frame Range. In this example. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select PNG. Los Angeles. for Model Graphics Style. click Save. you open each image. For Frames per second. Under Output Length. For Dimensions. enter 450 in the first field (width). and click OK. click . and enter 5 to 10. For File name. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. TIFF. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. or GIF. select Winter Solstice. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. BMP. NOTE When you export to PNG. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for Compressor. verify that the value is set to 15. 20 On the File menu. 8 In the Save As dialog. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. of the animation separately. click OK. such as JPEG. select Frame range.Los Angeles. or frame. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. For Save as type. click Save. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 In the Save As dialog. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. or any single-frame format. Under Format. click Save. 2 On the View Control Bar.

Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. under 3D Views. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. click Save.9 On the File menu. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson.

5 Select the roof. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 .NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown. and on the View Control Bar.

specify 2:00 pm. and click OK. and click OK. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.Los Angeles . 16 In the Video Compression dialog. 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click the Multi-Day tab. and click Save. and click Duplicate. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. 18 On the File menu. USA.Boston. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . On the Annotation Categories tab. select One week.Week Interval. for File name enter 2pm . clear Section Boxes. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. and click OK. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). 12 In the Name dialog. click Save. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 8 On the View Control Bar. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. 17 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click OK. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. Click the Desktop icon. For Time. for Compressor.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. click OK. MA. For Time Interval. In the Save As dialog. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study .

2 On the View Control Bar. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . change the time back to 12:00 PM. and select Winter Solstice.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. click . and click OK. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Apply. specify 11:00 AM for time. click . NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 9 Under Date and Time. Orienting to True North | 391 . 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. and click OK. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. on the Still tab. select Cast Shadows. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. In this exercise. click the Still tab. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 11 Under Date and Time. For example. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. select Summer Solstice. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Then. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22.

16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and select Winter Solstice. under Graphics. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. On the Options Bar. 13 On the View Control Bar. double-click 01 Entry. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Still tab. click OK. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. In the Element Properties dialog. select True North. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. Notice that the project rotates in the view. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. in the Angle from Project to True North field. click OK. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. under Floor Plans. and select View Properties. for Orientation. and click OK.

for File name. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 19 In the Project Browser. click . and click OK. verify that AVI Files is selected. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Single-Day tab. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. and click Apply. select Summer Solstice. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. 21 On the View Control Bar.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. under 3D Views. click Summer Solstice. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Orienting to True North | 393 . are saved with the project. Los Angeles. For Save as type. In the Save As dialog. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click the Still tab. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. including the angle from True North.

1 In the Project Browser. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. and exporting it as a JPEG image. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. On the Options Bar. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. Rendered views do not have this limitation. for Dimensions. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Raytrace. In this exercise. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering. and click OK. under Graphics. for Scene. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Right-click in the drawing area. for Resolution. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. Click the Desktop icon. capturing it. 2 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. enter 600 in the first field. and click OK.■ Under Format. click Save. under 3D Views. 29 On the File menu. for Compressor. double-click 01 Entry. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Once you are finished with the study. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Since a rendered image is temporary. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. for Orientation. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. under Floor Plans. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. and click Save. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. select Draft (75 dpi). The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. and select View Properties. 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select Project North. click GO. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.

In the Save As dialog. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. The scene is rendered in high resolution. under Renderings. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. On the Options Bar. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. for Save as Type. click Export Image. click Capture Rendering. for Resolution. click GO. click Save. and click Save.■ ■ On the Options Bar. In the Project Browser. select Presentation (300 dpi). Rendering an Interior View | 395 . select JPEG. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 Review some captured images of the building.

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

or the client. length.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. the Linework Tool. Whether the audience is the general contractor. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. type. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. and Section Boxes. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345. sections. In this tutorial. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. there are several options for expressing the architecture. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. elevations. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 . For the realistic approach. In this series of exercises. you explore the stylistic approach. To express texture beyond material specifics. Advanced Model Graphics." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. and details. an outside reviewer. a consultant." In Revit Architecture.

Co-house.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built building model. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. 398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. you create a presentation floor plan. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. right-click 2nd Flr.rvt.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. Cnst. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you create a copy of the plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.

Up Arrow. under Floor Plans. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active.2 In the Project Browser. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. elevations. and so on in this view. Cnst. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. dimensions. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. click the Scale control and select 1:100. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. and clear DOWN Text. This turns off the visibility of all tags. click the Annotation Categories tab. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. and click Rename. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. exit the menu. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 7 Under Visibility. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 3 In the Rename View dialog. sections. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. this represents the view getting smaller. 10 On the File menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice that no annotations display in this view. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. UP Text. click Save As. and click OK. 8 Click OK. Down Arrow. expand the Stairs category. click in the drawing area.

The higher the number. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. select By Date. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. on the Still tab. the darker the shadows.rvt. you can create. Within a Project. select Sun and Shadow Settings. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. click for Place. and click Save. USA for City. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 8 Select Boston. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 Under Settings. At that place. and click OK. double-click it in the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. Time and Place. 5 Under Settings. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. click the Place tab. Under Shadows Properties. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 . ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.rvt. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. ■ Under Intensity. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. modify. click . navigate to the folder of your choice. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.11 In the Save As directory. specify 35 for Shadow. MA.

Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. be aware that if you enter a different city. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you can enter any city you wish. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Settings. and click OK. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. Cnst. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403. click OK. and select 1st Flr.NOTE For this step. 11 Click OK. 402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. however. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. under Sun and Shadows Settings. click OK. clear Ground Plane at Level. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 17 On the File menu. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. click Save. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click .

Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click to place it. TIP If the View tab is not available. select Arch Portrait.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. click Sheet. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . click Modify. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. 4 In the Views dialog. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. and notice a view title displays. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. and click OK. and click View. and click Add View to Sheet.

enter Presentation. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click Edit/New. click . select No for Show Title. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. and click OK. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. To accomplish this. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 12 In the Name dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. under Graphics. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. For this analytique. click Duplicate. and click Activate View.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 . create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. for Fill Pattern. and select Chain. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. select Invisible Lines. If necessary. 25 In the Name dialog. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. and click OK. enter Solid Black. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. under Graphics. click . draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. click Region Properties. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. click . 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. When you are finished drawing the chain. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 18 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. and the boundary of the region.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. fill properties. click . TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 20 On the Options Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 22 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. click Filled Region. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Solid Fill. and click OK. and click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. and click OK. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Finish Sketch. 30 On the Design Bar. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. click Save. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 28 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. under Name. and click View Properties. under Identity Data. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. scroll down. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 34 On the File menu.

under Visibility. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. scroll up. on the Model Categories tab. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. clear Visible. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 . TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Pattern Overrides. click in the Walls row.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. enter Presentation South Elevation. right-click Copy of South. exit the menu. click Override. right-click South. click in the drawing area. expand Elevations. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. expand the Doors category. under Visibility. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and clear Elevation Swing. and click OK. under Views (all). and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. under Elevations. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. 9 Click OK. and click Rename.

you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. By changing the angle of the sun. click Save. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408. specify 35 for Shadow. 20 On the File menu. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. Time and Place. under Settings. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. 16 In the Name dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click .Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. 13 Under Intensity. and click OK. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select By Date. select Cast Shadows. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Duplicate. 12 Under Shadow Properties. click OK.

Presentation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. and click Add View to Sheet. click Add View. Notice the viewport displays a view title.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. expand Sheets (all). Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Views dialog.rvt. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. under Views (all). 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. and double-click A105 .

select Viewport: Presentation. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 7 On the Design Bar. Notice the view title no longer displays.5 In the Type Selector. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. click Modify.

you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. click Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 . Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 9 Proceed with the next lesson.8 On the File menu. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411.

and double-click Section 2. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. double-click 1st Flr. To accomplish this. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 4 Add the section shown below. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view.rvt. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Floor Plans. Cnst. 3 On the Options Bar. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 1: 100 for Scale. click Section. To fit correctly in the analytique. Section 2 is added to the building model. expand Sections (Callout 1). The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall).Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

and click Rename. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Modify. 11 In the Rename View dialog. under Pattern Overrides. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. select 1 : 100 for Scale. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 . click Override. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). 10 In the Project Browser. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Section 2. and click OK. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. under Sections (Callout 1). 7 On the Options Bar. click the Model Categories tab. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. enter Presentation Section 2. 15 Under Visibility. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). click in the Walls row.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. clear Visible.

and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. under Extents. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click OK. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Crop Region Visible. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. 22 On the Options Bar. scroll up. 20 Click OK. clear Annotation Crop.17 Under Visibility. click . When you select the crop boundary. and clear Elevation Swing. expand the Doors category. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

24 On the File menu. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Under Shadows Properties. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. select Cast Shadows. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Under Intensity. 2 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . In addition. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click Save. double-click Presentation Section 2. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. Click Apply. open the Project Browser and. specify 35 for Shadow. under Sections (Callout 1).rvt.

■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. under Settings. select Override Silhouettes. click OK. select Directly. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Duplicate. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. click Save. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Silhouette Edges. 11 On the File menu. under Silhouette Edges. was added to this dataset for training purposes. and click OK. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. select Relative to View. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees.In the steps that follow. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. NOTE The line style. 5 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click .

The view title no longer displays. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 . select Viewport: Presentation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. select Section: Presentation Section 2. click Add View. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. 3 In the Views dialog.rvt.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. 5 In the Type Selector. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Presentation. and click to place the selected view.

move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. under Sections (Callout 1). 9 On the Edit toolbar. In the steps that follow. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. you click to specify the start radius. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. and press ENTER. 418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. double-click Section 2. To rotate an object.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. click . Using a clock as a reference.

Presentation. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. the callout rotates 180 degrees. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 . and drag it up and to the left as shown. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Presentation. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser.15 On the Design Bar. 420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Create View Template from View. click Modify. 2 On the View menu. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. and click OK. click OK. After applying the view template to a new section view. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). 16 On the File menu. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.rvt. 3 In the New View Template dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. 4 In the View Templates dialog. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420. click Save.

7 In the Rename View dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. Notice the furniture. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. right-click Copy of Section 1. select Viewport: Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. under Sections (Type 1). annotations.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet.Presentation. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and click OK. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. select Presentation. 12 In the Views dialog. lighting fixtures. click View Properties. Now. 16 On the View menu. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . and elevation swings no longer display. you can simply apply the presentation view template. right-click Section 1. and click Rename. enter Presentation Section 1. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. 15 Right-click the viewport. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Apply View Template. select Section: Presentation Section 1. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). and click Add View to Sheet. under Sections (Type 1). click Add View. and click Activate View.

“Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422. 18 Right-click the viewport. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. click Save. under Graphics. traditional analytiques contain a detail. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. In this exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. such as a tracery window or column capital. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. 20 On the File menu.17 In the Element Properties dialog.

and click Rename. Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 . double-click Section 1. right-click Callout of Section 1. 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Sections (Callout 1).Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Presentation Callout. double-click Presentation Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. After you add the callout. under Sections (Type 1). click Modify. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Rename View dialog. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. under Sections (Callout 1). select the callout.

under Extents. and click View Properties. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 8 Right-click. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. clear Crop Region Visible. clear Annotation Crop.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown.

and click Add View to Sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Views dialog. click Add View. and move it into the position shown below. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. click Modify. and click OK. Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 . 17 On the View menu. 14 In the Type Selector. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet.Presentation. click View Properties. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . select Viewport: Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Callout. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and click Deactivate View. and click Activate View. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom for View Scale.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser.

click Region Properties. double-click Presentation Callout. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. and make adjustments as necessary. When finished. under Sections (Callout 1). activate the viewport. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. and click OK. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. click Filled Region. In the steps that follow. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. select Solid Black for Type.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. 426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You do not have to replicate the image exactly. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Design Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar.

26 On the Project Browser. 29 On the Options Bar. double-click A105 . click Filled Region. and click Activate View. Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.Presentation. and sketch the rectangle shown below. click . under Sheets (all). 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. click View Properties. 33 Select the crop region. under Extents. select Crop Region Visible. 31 On the View menu.30 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click Finish Sketch. 428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays.

click View Properties. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . click Save. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson.34 On the View menu. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. and click OK. and apply shadows to the views. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 37 On the File menu. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and click Deactivate View.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Duplicate. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Under Intensity. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Under Shadows Properties. click . specify 35 for Shadow. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. and click 1 : 200. 3 On the View Control Bar. click the Scale control. and click OK. 7 In the Name dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 2 On the View menu. double-click Isometric. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.rvt.

right-click Isometric 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Rename View dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click OK. under 3D Views. 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Isometric 2. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. under 3D Views. under Settings. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. under 3D Views. and click Rename. click View Properties. 13 In the Rename View dialog. Select Relative to View. under Extents. enter Isometric 1. Select 1st Flr. select Override Silhouettes. under Silhouette Edges. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. in the list. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. right-click Isometric. Cnst. select Section Box. Select Ground Plane at Level. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 . 9 Click OK. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 18 On the View menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. under 3D Views.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

and click Rename. under 3D Views. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. You can use this to rotate the section box. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box.20 Select the section box. under 3D Views. 23 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. make a duplicate of the view. When you are finished. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Modify on the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box.

31 To hide the section box. 29 Select the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK. Notice the section box no longer displays. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. double-click Isometric 3.Presentation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 34 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. select Viewport: Presentation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. either adjust the plane location. and click OK. Next. 26 To hide the section box. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 . and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. In such a case. double-click A105 . clear Section Boxes. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser.24 In the Rename View dialog. under Sheets (all). double-click Isometric 2. the stairs and railings may display. clear Section Boxes. When you are finished. 25 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 3. and click OK.

under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. 36 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. select Viewport: Presentation. in the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and.35 In the Project Browser. 434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. and click OK.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. select Concrete for Type. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. 39 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Design Bar. 44 Using the drawing tools. 42 Click OK twice. click Lines. click Region Properties. under Graphics. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Select the poche filled region. and on the Options Bar. click Region Properties. click Finish Sketch. 43 On the Design Bar. This will make it easier to draw lines. and click Deactivate View. select Transparent for Background. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click Edit/New. The image below shows the lines redrawn. select Solid Black for Type. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 On the Design Bar. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 . click Edit. and click Activate View.

3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add it to the presentation sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. a cutaway perspective view.49 On the File menu. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. under Floor Plans. then you specify the eye direction and range. double-click 1st Flr. you create the final view for the analytique. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 50 Proceed with the next exercise.rvt. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. click Camera. Cnst. click Save.

6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Under Shadows Properties. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . and click Advanced Model Graphics. Under Intensity. specify 35 for Shadow. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. select Cast Shadows. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.The view opens immediately.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box. A section box now cuts through the building model. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. 438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. select Override Silhouettes. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 12 Select the section box. and click OK. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. and click OK. click View Properties.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. Notice the controls that display on each plane. under Extents. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Silhouette Edges.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Scale (locked proportions). under Change. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . you must specify the actual size of the image. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 21 In the Project Browser. enter 165 mm for Width. 17 Under Model Crop Size. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. 15 On the Options Bar.14 Select the crop boundary. click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Size. 19 To hide the section box. double-click A105 . and click OK. After placing it. and click OK.Presentation. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. Clear Crop Region Visible. 18 To hide the crop region. under Sheets (all).

click Text. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. click Edit/New. enter Title. click . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Description. and click OK. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. select a font. and click OK.rvt. and click OK. click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. select the same font as the title. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. specify a text size of 6 mm. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 5 In the Name dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.22 On the File menu. 2 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Text : Title. 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Name dialog. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. click OK. click Save. specify a text size of 40 mm.

click Save. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. Annotating the Analytique | 441 . 15 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. 18 On the File menu. select Text : Description.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

click . 21 On the Options Bar. for Loc Line. 16 On the View toolbar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 19 On the Design Bar. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click Modify to end the command.15 On the Design Bar. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. verify Basic Wall: Generic .200mm displays. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. click you created. click Wall by Face. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 . 20 In the Type Selector. 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form. select Core Face: Exterior.

create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 28 On the Options Bar. click to view only the walls and roofs. 27 Select the left face of the left mass. click Curtain System. Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar. click Create System. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays.23 On the View toolbar. 24 Click to redisplay the masses. 26 In the Type Selector. 29 Using the same technique. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .

32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Create Roof. and select it. click . Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 .30 On the View toolbar. click Wall by Face. and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms. 34 Select the mass face shown below. Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. click Roof by Face. Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. and on the Options Bar.

36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Create System. click Wall by Face. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click to view the building that you have created. 38 On the View toolbar. click Curtain System. Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar. 39 Click to redisplay the masses.Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and select the mass face shown below.

click in the view. as shown. roofs. click Camera.Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. The perspective view created by the camera displays. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 . to view only the walls. 42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. 41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. specify a point for the camera target. under Floor Plans. In the far left corner of the building that you created. 44 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. specify a point to place the camera. Below the right corner of the view. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.

48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. for Justification. Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. Under Grid 2 Pattern. Click OK.You may need to resize the view again. click . Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar. and select the left curtain system in the view. 46 On the Options Bar. click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Center. select Center. 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click Modify. Under Grid 1 Pattern. Click the frame to display its grips. for Justification.

click Door. click . under 3D Views. 52 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View 1. 57 In the Type Selector. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . 58 Add doors to the building as shown below. 55 On the View toolbar. 56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and move the roof edges as shown below. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building. double-click {3D}. Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 51 Right-click. 53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.50 Select each roof to display its grips. and click Cancel to end the command. under 3D Views.

472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .59 Save and close the drawing.

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

thus the term family. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project.About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based. Even though various types within a family can look completely different.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. shape. they are still related and come from a single source. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. each with a different size. material set. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. In this tutorial. 475 . or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date.

and save them from a project file to your library if needed. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. however. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. while many more are stored in component libraries.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. trees. This makes file management much easier. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. generic. In this lesson. exterior. floors. and when and how to use it. The basic walls system family. floors. Walls. For example. Host-based families have components that require hosts.rfa extension. transfer them from one project to another. Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. exceptions to this rule. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project.rfa extension. but you cannot create new system families. foundation. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. and roofs are examples of these types of families. You can load them into projects. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . because there is only one file to track. such as a dome roof. for example. Using the Family Editor. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . and roofs. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. and furniture. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. You also learn about the Family Editor. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. and partition wall styles. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. In addition. There are. has wall types that define interior. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. Standalone families include columns. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an .

and when to use it. or 3D. how to access it. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. it is saved with the project. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. Load Family command on the File menu. To add a family to your project. you can drag it into the document window. and also a standalone furniture family component. if you change the original family. you learn about the Family Editor. such as plan. elevation. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. In the final exercise. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. After the family has been loaded in the project.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. custom wall treatments. In this section. 2 On the File menu. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 . However. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. or you can load it using the Load From Library. for example. You create in-place families only within the current project.

5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. modify it as needed.In this exercise. select the appropriate template. and then load it into the project. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. navigate to a family file.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor. 3 Next. With Revit Architecture open. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. you can click File ➤ Open. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. presume it is a bay window that you require. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. how to access it. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. you can double-click any file with an . you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. it should be available within the Type Selector. it opens within the Family Editor. When the family opens. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. 9 Save the newly-defined family. Within the Windows® environment. If you find a close match. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 5 Finally. if you have exhausted your external resources. you learn when to use the Family Editor. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. consider checking the web library and other web resources. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. and click Open. open it in the Family Editor. To start a new family. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. such as newsgroups. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. In this case. and click Open.

you create an in-place family. You create a furniture family. and several annotation families. When you create an in-place family. In addition. 479 . you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. you create it within the project file. you learn how to create a different type of component. you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families. not within the Family Editor. In each lesson. a lighting fixture.Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. Using the installed templates.

The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion.Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. To quit the sketch mode. ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar. and test after each step. fill patterns. continue to incrementally add reference planes. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. switch between the different host types. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. and Sweep. create different host types for testing purposes. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly. When you are in sketch mode. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views. Base and Top. Note that no geometry is created. materials. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. it automatically cuts the solid. Revolve. lineweight settings. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template. Each sketch is set to a different height. You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. line colors. if required. Blend. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. line patterns. If you place the void before you add the solid. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. and export settings for selected geometry. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. build geometry. Blend: A blend contains two sketches. Solids and Voids are sketch based. Step 2: Define additional subcategories. Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch. if the family includes a host. and pin those reference planes. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

and create one below.Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important. therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 . The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view.rft. click Ref Plane. click to pin the reference planes. verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. 3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry. and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. and click OK. click Training Files. verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. select both reference planes. and on the Options Bar. Adding Reference Planes Next. You have created a new furniture family. You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back). and click OK. 5 While pressing CTRL. 8 Using the same method. and click Open. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. select Metric Furniture. . The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes. and create one to the right. Level is open. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog. click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. The floor plan Ref. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane.

and click OK.4 Click Modify. for Identity Data ➤ Name. click . 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and. on the Options Bar. enter Left. 482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views.

The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. right. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. Front. The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. and click OK. as shown. define the priorities of the reference planes you have created.7 Using the same method. These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. left. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. and on the Options Bar. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. and Back. 1 Select the Left reference plane. select Left. the strong reference is always captured first. use Left for the Is Reference value. If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family. top). Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. click . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. The reference allows minor strength snapping. Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. for Other ➤ Is Reference. name the other reference planes Right. These behave the same as strong references.

484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes. Click the temporary dimension. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the dimension line. We want drive Length. Repeat for the other reference plane. specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right. and Back). Click the temporary dimension. 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane. 2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter. Width. and press ENTER. for Label. Click OK. and click above the planes to place the dimension. 5 Click Modify. enter 300mm. Repeat for the other reference plane. for Name. For Group parameter under. select Dimensions. Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string. enter 750mm. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Front. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. 7 On the Options Bar. select Add Parameter. click Dimension. enter Length.3 Using the same method. and press ENTER. and Height as parameters of the furniture family.

9 Using the same method. dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter. 12 Using the same method. click to place the dimension. dimension the horizontal reference planes. 11 Click each of the vertical reference planes. and click the EQ symbol above the dimension. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 . Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. for Other ➤ Is Reference. and click . click the base reference planes. but do not appear in the project. you need to specify the Is Reference values. Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes. 15 Using the Element Properties dialog. 16 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. name them Base Left. Base Front. 486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and press ENTER. Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. click Ref Plane. select Not a Reference. 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and Base Back. Base Right. 14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. Now the reference planes can be used in the family.

20 On the Design Bar.19 Using the same method. position the remaining new reference planes. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 . 21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes. and lock the dimension. click Dimension.

488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and lock the dimensions. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. 26 Select the middle reference plane. The front view displays. 23 In the Project Browser. enter Base Bottom. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Next. select Not a Reference. elevation. Under Is Reference. 25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. click Ref Plane. 24 On the Design Bar. You can dimension reference planes in plan. dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes. and section views. For Identity Data ➤ Name. double-click Front. Click OK.22 Using the same method. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view. By default. under Elevations. 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm.

39 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Dimensions. Under Is Reference. enter Height. 34 Lock the dimension.29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm. 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane. Click OK. select Top. and click to place the dimension. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 . Under Group parameter under. select Add Parameter. The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. For Identity Data ➤ Name. and save the file as Cabinet. click Dimension. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 32 On the Design Bar. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . navigate to Training/Metric/Families. 36 Click Modify. 30 With the top reference plane still selected. for Name. you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog. 37 Select the last dimension added. In the next exercise. Click OK.rfa. 33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. for Label. on the Options Bar. enter Top.

Level. enter 2800. under Family Types. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. for Width. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800. for Height. For Length. enter 1800.Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. each type is represented with selected parameters. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog. for Width. 1 In the Project Browser. Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. 10 Click Apply. For Length. 5 Using the same method. under Floor plans. enter 1000. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . When a family is loaded in a project. enter 2000. NOTE In the Family Types dialog. but no geometry has been added. for Name. and click OK. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes. double-click Ref. click Family Types. 4 In the Name dialog. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. 3 In the Family Types dialog. 11 Click OK. 6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 7 Click Apply. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types. 8 Using the same method. enter 1000. create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click New. enter 800. and dimensions are specified. parameters. for Height.

you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. In that case. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view. under Floor Plans. select the geometry. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. where you can define the plane. Creating Geometry In this lesson. and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar. 2 On the Design Bar. Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. In such an instance. Level. This option will display the Work Plane dialog. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components. double-click Ref. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode. The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog. you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. create an extrusion from the plan view. Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family.Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes.

5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane. You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes. the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view. 6 On the Sketch tab. An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. click . When the setup is more complex.3 On the Options Bar. 4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes. The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view. When the parameters Length and Width change. do not sketch directly on the reference planes.

8 On the Options Bar. 10 Lock the dimension.Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser. NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it. Creating Solid Forms | 493 . and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. 9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference. under Elevations. click (Align). double-click Front.

and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. click Visibility.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The base should display only in elevation and 3D views. double-click Front. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 23 Save the file. 494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 17 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. Level. 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar. 19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference. under View Specific Display. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. 20 Click Modify. and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. under Elevations. 18 On the Tools toolbar. click . double-click Ref. clear Plan/RCP. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. click .

For the furniture family. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. They are view direction specific.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. click Family Types. 10 On the View Control Bar. 13 Click OK. under Detail Levels. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. verify that the Line tool is active. but not in coarse. select a different family type. 2 While pressing CTRL. 1 In the Project Browser. For example. select the symbolic line. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Click Modify. elevation. and section views of the family. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. and lock the geometry. 3 On the View Control Bar. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. under Floor plans. double-click Ref. When you use 3D geometry. 12 In the Family Types dialog. and lock the geometry. select both lines and. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Visibility. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . By design. and click OK. 5 On the Options Bar. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. and click Apply. elevation. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. 14 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes. click Symbolic Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. and click the locks to create the constraint. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry. the software automatically creates the correct plan. The lines are greyed out. 8 While pressing CTRL. Level. 6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner. and section views. clear Coarse. The lines display again. on the Options Bar.

Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser. The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. Before you save the family. under 3D views. 2 On the View Control Bar. set a 3D view of the family current. Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. 5 Save the file. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. This opens a predefined 3D view. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest.The geometry of the furniture family is complete. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View. double-click View 1. 496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. Creating a Door Family | 497 . click . 10 In the Project Browser. If required. All the family types you created are listed as options. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. this view is maintained when the family is opened again. click (3D). 13 Close all open projects or families. drag each of the types into the drawing area. click Load into Projects. Creating a Door Family In this lesson. You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type. and click to place them. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. The family is loaded into the new project. under Cabinet.NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. 12 On the Views toolbar. 9 In the Project Browser. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click Modify.

2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. click Training Files. The door type has a variable height and width. 498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. height.rft. Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. you draw the plan view components for the new door family.You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. and thickness.

Level. 10 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Window menu. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. Notice the four tiled views. and represent the door opening profile. are also displayed. select Doors [projection]. Floor Plan: Ref. click Tile. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template.4 On the View menu. click Symbolic Lines. Labelled dimensions. 9 In the Type Selector. part of the door properties. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . 6 Maximize the window. click . this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 7 Enter ZF.

Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.

click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. select Thickness for Label. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 .Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. select Width for Label. 19 On the Options Bar.

and select the command from the menu. click the down arrow button. 23 On the Options Bar. 502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . along with the witness line controls. 24 Enter SI. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. then you specify each end point. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. as shown. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. 22 In the Type selector. select Plan Swing [cut]. click .Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. you first specify the arc center. When drawing an arc from center and end points. click Symbolic Lines. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. 21 On the Design Bar. In the image below.

and click OK.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 . double-click Exterior. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Set Work Plane. enter 50 mm for Depth. under Elevations. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. 2 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click . 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines.

click Finish Sketch. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion.8 On the Design Bar. then click to specify the dimension witness line. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. click Dimension. 504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 On the Design Bar. double-click Left. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations.

Level. Medium. and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify and select the dimension. and clear Plan/RCP. click Visibility. and Fine are selected. click Modify. select Front/Back. verify that Coarse. double-click Ref. under View Specific Display. under Floor Plans. 19 Under Detail Levels. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and When cut in Plan/RCP. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 .12 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. Left/Right. 13 On the Options Bar. select Thickness for Label. 14 In the Project Browser.

“Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the New Material dialog. under Name. select Panel for Subcategory. click OK. click . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under AccuRender. and click OK. 2 In the Materials dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. click . you assign a material to the door leaf. click 11 In the Materials dialog. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. click OK. select Oak Door for Name. for Material. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.20 On the Options Bar. select Oak Door. click 17 In the Materials dialog. click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Materials dialog. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. enter Oak Door for Name. 6 Click OK. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. and click OK. 7 In the Materials dialog. click . click Duplicate. click Modify.Red/Stained. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. 5 In the Material Library dialog. It also defines its appearance when rendered. 15 On the Options Bar. click for Texture.Dark. 21 In the Element Properties dialog.No Gloss. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Materials. 9 On the Options Bar. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. for Material. under Materials and Finishes. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

under 3D Views. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. and select Shading with Edges. 21 On the View Control Bar. double-click View 1. under Views (all). View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. click the Model Graphics Style control.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 . The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame.

Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. Enter 1000 mm for Width. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. 2 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. 27 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. By flexing the new component. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types. Click Apply. Click Apply. 25 In the Family Types dialog. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. under Family Types. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. Under Other. 3 In the Name dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 2500 mm for Height. “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. click New. Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter 2000 mm for Height. Under Other. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts.

enter 2000 mm for Height. 6 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. 17 Under Create new. 12 On the File menu. Define the third new door type. 5 Under Family Types. 7 In the Family Types dialog.rfa. click New. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.4 In the Family Types dialog. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. under Template file. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. enter 2134 mm for Height. Click Apply. Training Door. click New ➤ Project. 10 In the Family Types dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 925 mm for Width. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 750 mm for Width.rfa. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 8 Under Family Types. Defining New Door Types | 509 . 11 Click OK. and click OK. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. click Load. Click Apply. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Define the second new door type. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. click Browse. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 15 In the New Project dialog. Enter 1220 mm for Width. click Save. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. and click OK. click New.rte. and click OK. 19 On the Options Bar. enter 2100 mm for Height. select Project. click Wall. and click Open. 20 In the Open dialog. Click Apply. select it. Training Door. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. click Door. 9 In the Name dialog.

and select Shading with Edges. 24 On the View Control Bar.23 On the View toolbar. 26 In the Type Selector. click Door. 25 On the Design Bar. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 28 In the Type Selector. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. click the Model Graphics Style control. 510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. click .

This completes the lesson.30 In the Type Selector. default sill height. glazing and mullions as extrusions. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. Creating a Door Family. Finally. 32 You can close all files without saving. and mullion offset. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. You create the window frame. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. Creating a Window Family | 511 . and specify values for the window width. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. and create the window sash as a sweep. height.

is one of the type parameters. you specify the parameters for the new window family. Height and Default Sill Height. click New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. also one of the window properties. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. 2 On the File menu.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. The window type has a variable height and width. When you add labels to dimensions. 5 Enter ZF. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. 512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. equally spaced vertical mullions. The label name. click Training Files. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view.rft. 6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project.

11 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. Enter 1800 mm for Width. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. enter 1300 mm for Height. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening. and click Apply. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. click Sketch 2D Path. and click Apply. This process is called “flexing the model. click Family Types. 8 In the Family Types dialog. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. This is the starting point for the new window. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. then sketching the sweep profile. Snap the cursor to each corner. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 .Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. 10 Click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Change the height and width values again. click Lines.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. Click Apply. 4 On the Options Bar. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar.

click Finish Path. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 7 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. click the Scale control. and specify an offset of 50 mm. 9 In the Go To View dialog. 10 On the View Control Bar. select Elevation: Right. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. and click Open View.6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size. 12 On the Design Bar. click Sketch Profile. click . 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. click Ref Plane. and select 1:10.

click . select Chain and click . 21 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the dimension. 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. click Lines. 20 On the Design Bar. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 25 Below the red dot. 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. click Dimension.15 On the Design Bar. Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and select the reference plane. select Prefer: Wall faces. enter Sash for the Name. 16 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . click Modify.

516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. 28 Select the left edge of the frame section. 26 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the interior face of the wall.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. When the lock displays. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. 27 Select the right edge of the frame section. When the lock displays. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. However. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. the exact dimensions are not critical.

select the line you want to move. When the lock displays. as shown. click Modify. 31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. click Dimension. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. TIP After adding the dimension. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 .29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. and specify the dimension value. 30 On the Design Bar. click it to lock the line to the reference plane.

zoom out until it displays. click Finish Sweep. click the lock to constrain the present value. 34 On the Tools toolbar.Modify each dimension if necessary. 37 On the Design Bar. click the lock to constrain the present value. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. When the lock displays. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension. 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. click . 36 On the Design Bar. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. this is the top of the window opening. click Finish Profile. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. Next. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. When the lock displays.

and select Lock.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519.45 mm for Depth. click . under Views (all). you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. 39 In the Project Browser. under Specify a new Work Plane. under Elevations. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. and enter . Chain of walls or lines. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. If necessary. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. and double-click View 1. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Set Work Plane. 38 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and select the option. 2 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior.

You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. ■ ■ Enter . click Finish Sketch.50 mm for Offset. set the following options: Click . 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.The entire sash outline is selected. and lock icons display on each line. ■ Click . 520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 On the Design Bar. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar.

11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. double-click View 1. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 . you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. under 3D Views.10 In the Project Browser. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Right. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. The window sash extrusion is now complete. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise.

3 On the Options Bar. 522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 On the Design Bar. and enter 30 mm for Offset. double-click Right.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. as shown. under Elevations. click Ref Plane. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. click . 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right.

click . click . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Set Work Plane. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. enter -12 mm for Depth. 16 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Work Plane dialog. click Dimension. and click OK. under Identity Data. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 15 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the reference plane. 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary. 11 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Design Bar. and select Lock. click Lines.5 On the Design Bar. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click Modify. double-click Exterior. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Elevations.

sash. double-click Right. 20 Select the glass extrusion. View the window model with frame. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and glass 19 In the Project Browser.18 On the Design Bar. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog. and click OK. under Identity Data. After the family is loaded into a project. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. 23 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click . under Elevations. click Modify. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter.

26 In the Family Types dialog. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. double-click View 1. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Click Apply. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Under Other. click Family Types.24 In the Project Browser. enter 1500 mm for Height. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. NOTE After flexing the model. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 . enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. under 3D Views. For example. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .27 Click Cancel. click to return the window to its original dimensions. click Dimension. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Exterior. under Elevations. 28 On the Edit toolbar. 4 On the Design Bar. the exact location is not critical. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Ref Plane.

as shown. as shown. After adding the dimension. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 .Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it.

select Family parameter..9 On the Options Bar. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 12 In the Family Types dialog.. under Dimensions. enter Mullion Offset for Name. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. and click OK.> for Label. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. 11 On the Design Bar. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. Select Instance. select Dimensions. Under Parameter Data. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Family Types. Under Group parameter under. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Click OK. select <Add parameter.

under Specify a new Work Plane. click Modify. and click . 18 On the Design Bar. and enter 350 mm as the new value. click Lines. 15 On the Design Bar. enter 14 mm for Depth.14 Click the dimension value. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 . 23 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Work Plane dialog. click Set Work Plane. 17 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. move the dimension value as shown. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. 22 On the Design Bar. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Offset for Label. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. As you did before. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. However. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions.

After you complete the sketch. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. Move the dimension values as shown. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. 26 On the Design Bar. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 . 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter> for Label. Select Type.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. select Dimensions. enter Mullion Width for Name. 30 On the Options Bar. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Click OK. Under Parameter Data. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Under Group parameter under. select Family parameter.

32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. and click Apply. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Select the dimension. 33 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. 532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. This is changed in later steps. Remember. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. and on the Options Bar. click Family Types. 35 In the Family Types dialog. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width.

it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. In this case. evenly spaced. and click OK. NOTE After flexing the model. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. or undoing the same.Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. click to return the window to its original dimensions. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar. 38 On the Edit toolbar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 . under Specify a new Work Plane. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. 41 In the Work Plane dialog. enter 1500 mm for Height. 40 On the Design Bar. and aligned with the sash edge. 37 Click Cancel. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. click Set Work Plane. Under Other. Click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name.

48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 43 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. click . and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. 47 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Modify. click Lines. 534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal.42 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 49 On the Design Bar. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 45 On the Design Bar. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. 46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value.

Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. Move the dimension value as shown. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Mullion Width for Label. 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Remember. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Select the dimension.50 On the Options Bar. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 . select Mullion Width for Label. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.

If necessary. Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the vertical mullions. 55 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click Join Geometry.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. 54 Select the horizontal mullions. double-click View 1.

59 Click Cancel. click Family Types. Click Apply. 57 On the Design Bar. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Under Other. so when you open the Family Types dialog. 58 In the Family Types dialog. Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 . Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height.Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. enter 1500 mm for Height. you can still see the window. Enter 1500 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

9 Select the window frame sweep.60 On the Edit toolbar. select Stained. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Materials dialog. 5 In the Material Library dialog. click Duplicate. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. you assign materials to the frame. 6 In the Materials dialog. under AccuRender. click Materials. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. Yellow/. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click to return the window to its original dimensions. double-click Exterior. the sash. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. No Gloss. and select Shading with Edges. click for Texture. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. click the Model Graphics Style control. 4 In the Materials dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. and click OK. under Elevations. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. Dark. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. and the mullions. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Pine Frame for Name. sash. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 In the New Material dialog. and click OK. sash. click OK.

click Visibility. 16 Under Detail Levels. 24 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.10 On the Options Bar. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. select Edit for Visibility. 18 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Materials dialog. clear the other view options. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 . Medium. under Graphics. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). click OK. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. verify that Coarse. double-click Right. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and click OK. Medium. verify that Coarse. under View Specific Display. select Pine Frame for Name. and Fine are selected. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click . The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. 20 Select the glass extrusion. and Fine are selected. and click OK. 23 Under Detail Levels. and click OK. under 3D Views. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. double-click View 1. click Modify. under View Specific Display. click for Material.

and glass display their assigned materials. “Defining New Window Types” on page 540. mullions. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. The window frame. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window.25 Zoom in on a window corner. sash. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. and click Apply. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. and click Apply. Defining New Window Types | 541 . Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. 3 In the Family Types dialog. In the Family Types dialog.

Enter 1250 mm for Height. verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. Click Apply. enter 1000 mm for Height. and click Apply. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Family Types. and click OK. 8 In the Family Types dialog.The window height is doubled. 7 In the Name dialog. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. click New. 5 In the Family Types dialog. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name.

and click OK. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Defining New Window Types | 543 . Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. Click Apply. Click Apply. click New. 11 In the Family Types dialog. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. 15 On the File menu. click Window. click to start a new project based on your default template. Training Window. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. 10 In the Name dialog. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. click New. click Load. 14 In the Family Types dialog.rfa. Enter 1300 mm for Height. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 19 On the Options Bar. Click OK. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. 13 In the Name dialog. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. click Save. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width.9 Under Family Types.

click . 27 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click the Model Graphics Style control. 32 On the View menu. click Thin Lines. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. clear Tag on Placement. 23 On the Design Bar. and select Shading with Edges. click Wall. 34 On the View toolbar. 33 Zoom in on the center window. 29 In the Type Selector. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. click Window. 24 On the Options Bar. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long.rfa file. navigate to the location of your Training Window. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 35 On the View Control Bar. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. Notice the detail that displays. select it.20 In the Open dialog. 31 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Type Selector. and click Open.

This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion. This allows you to drive lineweights. sketch. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. and create a complex window family with a complex opening. line patterns. where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type. The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. a parameter drives geometry in a family. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family. Basically. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises. Solid Revolve. elevation. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. and materials of the subcategories. you plan. For example. Instance parameter means. You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. and section views of a family. line colors.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Solid Blend. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 . model lines. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family. Model lines are displayed in every view. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family.

where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC.■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. and Elevation views. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No. ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework. you should define different widths for each of the casements. Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. 546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off. By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. Section. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project. A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse. Medium and Fine.

The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. select Metric Window. You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps. The family template uses a wall as host. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. 1 Close all open projects or families. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family. click Training Files. The family editor is opened with a new window family. you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family. and click Open.rft.

under Other. refer to the command line to verify what is selected. 10 Click OK 3 times. and on the Options Bar. accept the default name. for Is Reference. for Name. and click . select Weak Reference. select Defines Origin. 9 Click Modify. Under Other. in the Edit toolbar. click . click Ref Plane. enter 400. . for Structure ➤ Thickness. so you model the new opening first. Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. click Duplicate. select Basic Wall : Wall 1. click Edit/New. Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. for Construction ➤ Structure. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog. This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane. . 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. enter Insertion Edge. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. 11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. In the Type Selector. and click OK. 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. and on the Options Bar. Click OK. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Verify that Defines Origin is selected. click Edit. 7 In the Name dialog. click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. select Wall Closure.4 Select the wall.

use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane. 19 Select the dimension. dimension the vertical reference planes. 23 Click Modify. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar. and click . on the Options Bar. This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. enter Wall Offset Left. 16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. select Add Parameter. enter 75. Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar. For Group parameter under. for Label. 13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge. for Identity Data ➤ Name. enter Insertion Depth. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 . TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Dimension. click Dimension. By extending the reference pane. Click OK. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected.10 Select the first reference plane you created. 17 Click Modify. 12 Using the same method. 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. Next. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. and click OK. you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing. and select Instance. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. for the temporary dimension. The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. 14 Using the same method. select Constraints.

for Identity Data ➤ Name. double-click Exterior. select Construction. 27 Using the same method. enter 100.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. on the Options Bar. select Construction. 25 Select the dimension. 38 Select the dimension. click Dimension. enter Wall Offset Top. Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. for Label. 32 Click Modify. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. For Group parameter under. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Next. 31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. 35 On the Design Bar. enter Wall Offset Top. and press ENTER. select Add Parameter. Click OK. 28 Select the dimension. 33 Select the new reference plane. enter Wall Offset. and click . The skeleton for the opening is complete. Click OK. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane. 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes. under Elevations. for Name. and click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. select Wall Offset. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. for Label. for the temporary dimension. on the Options Bar. for the temporary dimension. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. for Label. select Add Parameter. enter 100. For Group parameter under. for Name. click Ref Plane.

6 On the Tools toolbar. under Specify a new Work Plane.40 Save the file as Casement Window. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref. and click OK. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 . NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes. 7 Select the Exterior reference plane. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. and lock the alignment. for Name. click (Align). 8 Using the same method. lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge.rfa. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry. under Floor Plans. select the top edge of the sketch. select Reference Plane : Sill. 5 On the Options Bar. and sketch the extrusion as shown. click . Level. click (Plane). Wall Offset Left. 1 In the Project Browser. and Wall Offset Right reference planes. 2 On the Tools toolbar.

9 On the Design Bar. 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane. 10 Using the same method. Interior. align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. 15 Using the same method. Also. create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown. click Finish Sketch. and Left reference planes. NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. 12 On the Tools toolbar. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut). Right. and press DELETE. double-click Exterior. and lock the alignment. click (Align). Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 On the Views toolbar. and lock the alignment. 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. click (3D). you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. In order to use the voids as a new opening.

19 Select the void. The first void is cut from the wall. you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters. Next. 20 Using the same method. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 . cut the second void from the wall. click (Cut Geometry). 18 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the wall geometry.The opening in the wall is deleted.

For Other ➤ Is Reference. enter 50mm. enter 100mm. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. 6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. for the temporary dimension. click Dimension. and click . 5 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the reference plane. Click OK. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane. 3 Select the reference plane.Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses. Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. For Wall Offset. select Not a Reference. click Family Types. Note that the opening has changed correctly. enter Frame Left. 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. For Identity Data ➤ Name. enter 50mm. 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. Level.

for the temporary dimension. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown. enter 100mm. select Add Parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. on the Options Bar. Click OK. select Construction. for Label. 17 Using the same method. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. name it Frame Interior. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. enter Frame Right. 16 Select the left dimension. 11 On the Design Bar.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. for Name. select Frame Width. Click OK. for Label. For Other ➤ Is Reference. enter Frame Width. select Not a Reference. click Dimension. For Group parameter under. 14 Select the right dimension. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 . on the Options Bar.

dimension the planes at 120mm. name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right. The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important. and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension.18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise. 556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 19 Using the same method used previously.

on the Options Bar.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. 28 Select the lower dimension. on the Options Bar. 25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane. 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane. For Identity Data ➤ Name. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm. enter Frame Height Top. for Label. For Other ➤ Is Reference. select Add Parameter. select Construction. select Construction. select Add Parameter. Click OK. 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. enter Frame Bottom. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . click Dimension. 22 Select the reference plane. Click OK. For Group parameter under. select Not a Reference. double-click Exterior. Click OK. 30 Select the other dimension. enter Frame Height Bottom. name it Frame Top. and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . for Label. for the temporary dimension. 24 On the Design Bar. For Group parameter under. 27 Using the same method. under Elevations. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. enter 150mm.

For Center Post Width. for Wall Offset Top. For Frame Height Top. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Insertion Depth. For Frame Width. for Wall Offset Top. enter 60mm. For Frame Height Bottom. Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness. 37 In the Name dialog. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 100mm.The skeleton of the window frame is complete. Under Dimensions. Under Other. Under Construction. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. enter 50mm. enter 80mm. enter 50mm. enter 80mm. enter 50mm. enter 100mm. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. enter 100mm. 35 In the Name dialog. enter 1500mm. for Frame Depth. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. enter 80mm. and click OK. For Frame Width. Before you model the frame geometry. click New. enter 2000mm. For Wall Offset. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. A family type manages type parameters only. 34 Under Family Types. For Width. click New. 36 Under Family Types. click Family Types. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. Under Construction. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. enter 100mm. for Insertion Depth. for Height. enter 70mm. For Wall Offset.

For Frame Height Bottom. 44 On the Options Bar. 40 Under Name. Head. 43 On the Design Bar. enter 1400mm. click . 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. 39 Click Apply. Right. Under Other. Frame Bottom. Center Post Right. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left. NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. enter 120mm. Under Dimensions. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. Frame Left. Frame Right. enter 80mm. enter 1500mm. Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior. one on the right. enter 120mm. 45 On the Tools toolbar. for Height. and click OK. Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 . For Width. 42 In the Work Plane dialog. click (Align). For Center Post Width. for Name.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes. Frame Top. click (Plane). Frame Bottom. and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. enter 70mm. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. Sill. Center Post Left. for Frame Depth.

47 On the Design Bar. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. . Under Detail Levels. Level. click Finish Sketch. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 57 On the View Control Bar. double-click Ref. 560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and lock the alignment. click (3D). 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. 49 On the Tools toolbar. 52 On the Views toolbar. and lock the alignment. clear Plan/RCP. Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial. 55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). clear Coarse. For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 48 In the Project Browser. select Frame/Mullion. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click Edit. under Floor Plans. The window frame is complete. 56 Click OK twice. 51 Click Modify.

select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. under Name. Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash. For Identity Data ➤ Name. and click OK. Level. click Family Types. enter Sash Left Left. 5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created. Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. click Scale ➤ 1:10. 59 In the Family Types dialog. and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . However. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes. double-click Ref. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail. 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. under Floor Plans. 4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the Views toolbar.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights. you model each sash separately.

Click OK. enter Sash Width. 16 Select the reference plane. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Not a Reference.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. double-click Exterior. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. Click OK. 15 Click Modify. working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. enter Sash Bottom. for Label. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. For Identity Data ➤ Name. You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip. under Elevations. 7 Using the same method. For Group parameter under. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 18 On the Design Bar. select Construction. select Sash Width. for Label. specify each dimension as 50mm. add parameters to the remaining dimensions. Click OK. on the Options Bar. Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. click Dimension. select Add Parameter. 11 Select the next dimension. select Not a Reference. 12 Using the same method. 9 Select the left dimension.

Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. for Label.19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. 25 For Name. click (Align). click . extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly. 26 Under Construction. 30 On the Options Bar. for Sash Width. click Family Types. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension. The skeleton of the window sash is complete. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes. and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. 21 Using the same method. 27 Click Apply. select both dimensions. Specify it as Not a Reference. 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane. enter 50mm. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Sash Width. 23 While pressing CTRL. create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. and click OK. for the temporary dimension. 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 28 For Name. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . enter 70mm. Before you model the sash geometry. enter 50mm. on the Options Bar. 22 Select the Sash Top reference plane. for the temporary dimension. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400.

43 On the Views toolbar. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. Level. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Extents ➤ View Range. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. 40 Click Modify. 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 42 Switch back to the Ref. and click OK twice. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). 34 In the Project Browser. Frame Bottom. Sash Right Left. 37 In the View Range dialog. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref.NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. 38 On the Tools toolbar. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Sash Top. and lock the alignment. and lock the alignment. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. for Cut plane ➤ Offset. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. 41 Using the same method. click Finish Sketch. Sash Bottom. Sash Right Right. Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. Frame Right. enter 1500. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. click (3D). Center Post Right.

47 Click OK twice. note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column. Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 . 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left. select the 2 extrusions. 6 Using the same method. and click . Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. clear Plan/RCP. for Graphics ➤ Visible. 5 Click OK 3 times. 7 On the Design Bar. select Frame/Mullion. Under Detail Levels. click Edit. For Group Parameter under. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. clear Coarse. click Family Types. 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash. select Construction. click Add parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ . 2 In the Element Properties dialog.44 While pressing CTRL. click the rectangular button on the right side. enter Sash Right.

and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. Glass Axis Left. click Dimension. Glass Axis. double-click Exterior. not aligned to reference planes.Test the family 8 For Name. select Not a Reference. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. clear Sash Left. enter Glass Axis. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off. For Identity Data ➤ Name. and name them Glass Axis Right. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. 6 Using one dimension string. double-click Ref. 9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. and click OK. Level. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. 8 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. For Other ➤ Is Reference. and Glass Axis Horizontal. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. under Elevations. dimension the Insertion Edge. Click OK. 10 Under Construction. Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. 3 Select the reference plane. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and Frame Interior reference planes. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400.

2 In the Work Plane dialog. Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise.10 For each of the new reference planes. You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry. and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. for Name. and click OK. select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family. Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 . click . This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes. click (Plane).

dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. for Label.Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. select Add Parameter. Click OK. 6 Using one dimension string. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch. and the right edge of the sketch. 7 Click EQ. 11 Select the dimension line and. click Dimension. 13 Using the same method. dimension the left edge of the sketch. 8 Using the same method. click Dimension. enter Glass Length Right. For Group Parameter under. and create a Glass Height Right parameter. select Other. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. the Glass Axis Right reference plane. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch.

and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Edit. Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 . For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. clear Plan/RCP. Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method. 18 Click OK twice. enter 10.0.0.14 On the Design Bar. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End. Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry. click Finish Sketch. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. 21 On the Views toolbar. enter -10. 20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right. Under Detail Levels. 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left. select Glass. click (3D). clear Coarse. For Extrusion Start.

as it will minimize performance hits. x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set. However. Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box. where all of the parameters for a family are listed. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges.22 On the View Control Bar. if you can build your family without using formulas. They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters.used to control families in many ways. set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions. you should do it. Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y. Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000. Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families .

(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>. under Parameters. 3' . 4 Click Modify. click Dimension. y = 2). enter 1000. 2' 6" . 2'-6". IF ( Length < 45' . enter Width Sash Left. 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes. 8 . for Label. <result-if-true>.6. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. Click OK. 5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane. 6 Select the dimension. For Type of Parameter. The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. 3 ) Simple IF . click Family Types. for the temporary dimension. NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method.11 Samples for formulas Standard Width . select Add Parameter. 8' ) ) ) IF . This would overconstrain the family. 8 . 5' .OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 .AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. select Dimensions. B = 3 ) . 9 In the Family Types dialog. Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 . double-click Ref. 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' . on the Options Bar. enter Width Sash Right. 8 On the Design Bar. 3'-0" ) Simple IF . under Floor Plans."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) . For Group parameter under. 8 . IF ( Length < 55' . 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' . select Length. click Add. Level.

You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog. The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. and press ENTER.Frame Height Top .Frame Height Bottom).(Frame Width * 2) .Width Sash Left) . select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. the new value is 560. click Family Types. enter 1200. Height .2 * Sash Width). ■ Click Apply. (Width Sash Right . Click OK.Frame Height Bottom . enter if(Sash Left.Frame Height Top . In the Formula row for Glass Height Right. (Height . enter if(Sash Right. enter formulas: ■ Under Other. ■ Click Apply. Width Sash Left).Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom . 19 In the Family Types dialog. enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width .2 * Sash Width). The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width. ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK. select Dimensions. and press ENTER. and Center Post Width. In the Formula row for Glass Length Left. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Width Sash Left. 17 For Name.■ ■ For Group Parameter under. 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 For Name. in the Formula row for Glass Length Right.Frame Height Top . the new value is 880. The value is greyed out.2 * Sash Width). 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. Test the family 13 Under Name. Frame Width. enter 400. 14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left.2 * Sash Width). and click OK.Frame Height Bottom).Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER. Width Sash Right). enter if(Sash Right. (Width Sash Left . for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula. enter if(Sash Left. In the Formula row for Glass Height Left. Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog. Height . 11 In the Family Types dialog. (Height .

under Specify a new Work Plane. click (Plane). Creating Elevation Lines | 573 . for Name. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. 3 Click OK. 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 9 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Tools toolbar. click Symbolic Lines. clear Chain. 7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. note the Elevation Swing subcategory. under Category. 8 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Project Browser. and lock all alignment constraints. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. under Elevations.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view. select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. They should be placed on a selected subcategory. double-click Exterior. expand Windows. select Elevation Swing [projection]. 10 Create single symbolic lines as shown.

while pressing CTRL. select all symbolic lines. and select Whites. 7 Select Cool. 16 Click OK twice. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side. 17 Using the same method. for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion.Matte. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Material Library dialog. under AccuRender. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. and click Duplicate. Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. 5 In the Materials dialog.11 In the drawing area. If the subcategory already exists in the project. click in the Material column. enter Window Frame. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. and on the Options Bar. and click . for Name. 4 In the New Material dialog. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. under Graphics. unless the default value is < By Category >. and glass. 13 While pressing CTRL. and click the button on the right side of the column. Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 3 In the Materials dialog. 15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click . select Sash Right. for Name. for Visible. this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family. When you assign default materials in a family. select the rectangular button on the right side. under Detail Levels. you create material parameters for the frame. sash. Next. 18 Save the file. click Visibility. and click OK. and click OK. clear Coarse. under Category. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project. select Default. and click OK three times. check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned.

You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model. You can override it on a type level.rfa. click Add parameter. 6 Click OK three times. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. Open the families and explore the design of them. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. If this parameter is defined as shared. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. For Group parameter under. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion.1 On the Views toolbar. Level. . Using family type parameters in the main family. 9 Click OK. create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass. a Width type parameter. 10 Save the file. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The default value is By Category. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill. parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family. When the family is loaded into a project. click the rectangular button on the right side. a Depth instance parameter. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. Creating Nested Families | 575 . 4 In the Project Browser. Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. click Training Files. the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. In this lesson. for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. enter Frame. which nests them. and click Open. 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame. click Family Types. 7 Using the same method. click (3D). and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Materials and Finishes. and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter. Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families. you can switch between imported families of the same category.

The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill. 6 In the Project Browser.rfa. and is visible only in detail level Fine. The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family. The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families. and click . 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 12 Select the solid geometry. 8 Click OK. and click . 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 Select the solid geometry. and click Open. has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned. under Elevations.5 In the Project Browser. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes. click Training Files. double-click Left. under 3D views. double-click View 1.

rfa is cleared. open m_Concrete Sill. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family. 4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and verify that m_Metal Sill. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. and verify thatm_Concrete Sill. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog.rfa. Parameters. and click Open. Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family. select Casement Window.rfa is cleared. 3 Using the same method.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. and then load families into the casement window family you have created. 6 Click OK. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Reference Planes. 10 Click OK. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned. 8 On the Design Bar. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. 2 In the Open dialog. 13 Click OK. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family.rfa. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. You open the main family first. 9 In the Load into Projects dialog. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family. and is visible only in detail level Fine. select Casement Window. click Load into Projects. navigate to Casement Window.rfa.rfa -3D View: View1. click Load into Projects. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 .

2* Wall Offset.rfa. Click OK. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. under Parameters. click Add. enter Width . select Construction.rfa and m_Concrete Sill. Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser. For Group parameter under. double-click Concrete Sill. As both sill families have been defined as Window families.rfa. they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows. 13 Maximize Casement Window. select Length. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar. 578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 Click OK. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 2 In the Family Types dialog. in the Formula column. Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Type of Parameter. click Family Types. you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family.12 Close and save m_Metal Sill. for Construction ➤ Sill Length. enter Sill Length.

double-click Ref. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views. The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. select Sill Length. click the rectangular button on the right side. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family. for Dimensions ➤ Width. Placing the Sill Family | 579 . Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. for Dimensions ➤ Length. 2 On the View Control Bar. Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area. 9 Click OK twice. you place the concrete sill in the project. Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. 3 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 10 Using the same method. click the rectangular button on the right side. and click . select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family.7 In the Type Properties dialog. The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. 9 Click OK twice. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and lock the alignment. under Floor Plans. Level. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. 5 Click Modify. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select Insertion Depth. 11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family.

14 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. align the bottom edge of the sill family. double-click Left. The sill is placed in the desired position. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 17 In the Project Browser. align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. and lock the alignment. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. TIP If the sill does not display. under Elevations. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family. Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level.12 Using the same method. double-click View 1. 15 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). you add a Sill Type parameter. and lock the alignment. click and spin the wall. 18 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views.

5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameter Type. click OK. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click Save. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. click Shared parameter. click Create. Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. 12 In the Family Types dialog. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill. for Name. 3 In the Save As dialog. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and click OK. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. 9 In the Select Category dialog. and click Select. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Family Types.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. 2 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters. Under Type of Parameter. click New. select Windows. enter Windows. for Label. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Groups. enter Training Shared Parameter. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). 10 Click OK 3 times. 4 Under File name. under Parameters. for Group parameter under. Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. select Constraints. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. Testing Nested Families | 581 . click New. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. select Sill Type. navigate to Training. If the family is then loaded into a project. select <Family Type>. select the Concrete Sill family. click Add. enter Sill Type. select Metal Sill. 3 Click Apply. and select Instance. click Family Types. 16 Click OK twice. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.

insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall. 3 On the Design Bar. and create a horizontal wall. 5 On the Design Bar. Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally. 7 Using the same method. click (3D). Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar. TIP If the sill does not display. check all views at all levels of detail. click and spin the wall. 8 On the Views toolbar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click the Window tool. This creates a new project with the default template. click the Wall tool. use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment. 6 In the Type Selector.rfa -3D View: View 1. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.4 Click OK. 9 In the View Control Bar. click Load into Projects. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. click .

and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. and click OK. select Windows.10 Select the smaller window. and click . you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. drawer base. Note that the window sill has changed. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and drawers as extrusions. enter Window Schedule with Sills. You begin by creating the desktop. Creating a Furniture Family | 583 . select Metal Sill. add the fields Mark. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. Width. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. rolltop. and click OK. 13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Height. Click OK. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. Under Name. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype.

and specify values for the furniture length and depth. 2 On the File menu. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. click Training Files. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. 5 On the View menu. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you draw the reference planes.Finally.rft. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. they represent the furniture centerline axes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. click Ref Plane. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. click New ➤ Family. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. 4 Maximize the view. Floor Plan: Ref. their exact location is not critical. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. Level.

add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar.8 Draw two vertical reference planes. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . as shown. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. click Dimension. and ending at the right reference plane.

Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the left reference plane. click Modify. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.

Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . click Dimension. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. as shown. and ending at the lower reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. as shown. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created.

18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 19 Select the upper. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. 588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP To do this. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. Afterwards. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. horizontal reference plane.

Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. select Family parameter. 27 On the Options Bar. Click OK.. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Under Parameter Data. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label. 24 On the Options Bar.. For Group parameter under. Select Type. specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type. enter Length for Name. select Family parameter... 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. select Dimensions. select <Add parameter. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 . 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog.> for Label. select <Add parameter.

■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. For Group parameter under. select Dimensions. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. Click OK. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select Type. click Family Types. Click Apply. 30 On the Design Bar. you can still see the model. so when you open the Family Types dialog. enter 3000 mm for Length. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. Therefore. enter Depth for Name. it will also adapt to the same changes. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 31 In the Family Types dialog.

3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Your lines may have a lighter weight. click Set Work Plane. click Symbolic Lines. click . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 . click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. Level for Name. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2000 mm for Length. and click OK. and click to select all four symbolic lines. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. and enter 100 mm for Depth. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Level: Ref. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. 5 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. NOTE In the image below. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591.32 In the Family Types dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. Click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. 8 On the Options Bar. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle.

and select the top edge. click Finish Sketch.10 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. and select the bottom edge. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. under Elevations. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. click Modify. click Dimension. 11 In the Project Browser. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level.

select <Add parameter. Click OK. Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. 25 On the Options Bar.> for Label. Under Parameter Data. click Modify. enter Height for Name. select Dimensions. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. enter Thickness for Name. Select Type. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 . select Dimensions. For Group parameter under. For Group parameter under.. click Modify. as shown. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter. Select Type. 22 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Click OK.> for Label... 27 On the Design Bar. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog.. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar.

double-click Ref. Click Apply. 594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 750 mm for Height. 3 On the Options Bar. Click OK. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. you can still see the model. 30 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. under Floor Plans. and click Apply. Enter 1200 mm for Height. so when you open the Family Types dialog.Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 29 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. 2 On the Design Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. 31 In the Family Types dialog. click . Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. Level. and click Apply. click Family Types. and enter 100 mm for Offset. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. enter 4000 mm for Length. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594. click Ref Plane. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Lock the dimension as shown.5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. Click the lock icon as shown. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. 6 On the Design Bar. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 . click Dimension. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it.

12 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. two lock icons display. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. under Specify a new Work Plane. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. 596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Level: Ref. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar.Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. Level for Name. as shown. click Set Work Plane. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. click . 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. After you complete the rectangle. click Lines. and click OK.

20 On the Tools toolbar. 19 Select the four sketched lines. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. click Dimension. using the TAB key. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 . 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. click Modify. Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar.16 On the Design Bar. You can also highlight the entire line chain. . click the Mirror tool.

23 For the align-to reference.A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . as shown below at the cursor. 22 On the Tools toolbar. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top.

Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base.A lock icon displays. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. click Dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. ■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 . 26 On the Design Bar.

29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. as shown.. Under Parameter Data. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter.28 Add two final dimensions..> for Label. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. Select Type. select Family parameter. For Group parameter under. Click OK. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. 600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Dimensions. 30 On the Options Bar.

38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 37 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. click . 34 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Design Bar.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Finish Sketch. 33 On the Options Bar. double-click Front.

43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. 42 On the View menu.39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. click . Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 45 On the View Control Bar. 41 On the View toolbar. However. click it to lock the alignment. 40 On the Design Bar. notice that annotations display in this view. After the alignment. a lock icon displays. you can still see the model. click Modify. click the Scale control and select 1:20.

48 In the Family Types dialog. 49 In the Family Types dialog. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. Click OK. and click Apply. Enter 1200 mm for Height. enter 2000 mm for Length. under Elevations.47 On the Design Bar. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. click Family Types. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 750 mm for Height. double-click Right. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Click Apply. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply.

click .2 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 6 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. 9 Select the desk top. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. and click to specify the upper left corner. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. click Set Work Plane. 5 On the Design Bar. then the lower horizontal sketch line. click . as shown. click Lines.

then select the right parallel sketch line. click Dimension.10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 . Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. and lock the alignment. and lock it. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. 11 On the Design Bar. and lock it.

and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. . Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. the upper sketch line. click Finish Sketch.13 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. click Lines. click the Fillet arc tool. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 . 18 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Front. under Elevations. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. select the left edge of the rolltop.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. and click the lock icon. select the right edge of the rolltop. click . and click the lock icon.

23 On the Design Bar. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1500 mm for Height. click Family Types. If not. and click Apply. You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. 24 In the Family Types dialog. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. enter 4000 mm for Length.21 On the View toolbar. click . you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. you can still see the model. The desk should adapt to all the changes.

and click OK. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Click Apply. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Set Work Plane. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. select Pick a Plane. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.25 In the Family Types dialog. enter 2000 mm for Length. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height.

If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. click . click . 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. 6 On the Design Bar. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. click drawer set on the left. double-click Front. 12 On the Options Bar. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. 11 On the Tools toolbar.5 In the Project Browser. . under Elevations. 14 On the Tools toolbar. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. select Multiple Alignment. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. click Dimension. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. There should be four dimensions as shown. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . zoom the view until you do. 9 On the Design Bar. Lock each dimension as you add it. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. click Lines. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width.

22 On the Options Bar. click OK. enter Desk . under AccuRender. click . These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 . Polished. click for Texture. under Constraints. click 24 In the Materials dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. for Material. click Finish Sketch. click .Wood. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. click Modify.15 On the Tools toolbar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click OK. click the Model Graphics Style control. 20 On the View toolbar. 26 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. Cherry. under Materials and Finishes. 25 In the New Material dialog. 31 On the View Control Bar. click Duplicate. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. 27 In the Material Library dialog. 28 Click OK. and select Shading with Edges. click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Dark. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. 29 In the Materials dialog. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions.

Enter 100 mm for Thickness. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. If not. Click OK. You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply. and click Apply. you can still see the model. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. 33 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Family Types dialog. The desk should adapt to all the changes. 35 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 750 mm for Height. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth.

to start a new project based on your default template. click New. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. 17 On the Options Bar. click New. under Family Types. click Family Types. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. click Save. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. click 14 On the View toolbar. click . 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. 19 In the Type Selector. 11 On the File menu. and click Apply. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. 6 In the Name dialog. click Apply. Training Furniture. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 18 In the Open dialog. 9 In the Name dialog. 10 In the Family Types dialog. 15 On the View Control Bar. 5 Under Family Types. 8 Under Family Types. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. and click OK. and click OK. click New. and click Apply.rfa. 2 In the Family Types dialog. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. Defining New Furniture Types | 613 .rfa file. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. and click OK. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. click Component. click Load. 7 In the Family Types dialog. 3 In the Name dialog. select it. and click Open. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family.

select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm.21 In the Type Selector. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. and click to add the third desk. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. and add the second desk. 23 In the Type Selector. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster. Level. and click OK. click Set Work Plane. and double-click Ref. expand Floor Plans. Level for Name. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. expand Views (all).rft. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. 2 On the View menu. select Ref. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. 7 On the Design Bar. Drawing a Baluster | 615 . 9 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click New ➤ Family. click Finish Sketch. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Lines. their exact location is not critical.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. However.

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. click Finish Sketch. The new custom baluster is now complete. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. click Training Files. 4 On the Design Bar. click Stairs. 6 On the Design Bar.rte. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog.rfa. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. click Modify and select the extrusion. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 7 On the File menu. click the Modelling tab. double-click Front. click . click New ➤ Project. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. By default. 12 On the Options Bar. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. select it. click . 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 On the View menu. 11 On the View menu. click OK. 19 Click OK. under Baluster Family. click Edit/New. and click Open.8 In the Open dialog. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click Shading with Edges. click Modify and select the existing railing. 9 On the View toolbar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 . 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. click OK.rfa file. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. 20 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. click . 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 13 On the Options Bar.

click Training Files. click Lines. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. a reveal. In this lesson. a stair nosing. click New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. and a host sweep. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. soffits. cornices. their exact location is not critical. click Training Files. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.rft. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. In the left pane of the New dialog. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. However. you create a rail profile. click New ➤ Family.Sweep. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. under Floor Plans. verify that Ref. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs.rfa. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. you create five different profiles: a sweep. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.rft. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. The new sweep profile is now complete. you draw a sweep profile. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail. Level is open. and other sweep-defined objects. In the left pane of the New dialog. balusters. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. a railing.

rfa. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 . The new rail profile is now complete. click Training Files. you create a stair nosing profile. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. However. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface.rft. click New ➤ Family. their exact location is not critical. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. In the left pane of the New dialog. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise.Rail. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. click Lines. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template.

Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. their exact location is not critical. under Floor Plans. click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.rfa. However. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser.rft. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. verify that Ref. Level is open. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . click Training Files. In addition. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal. you create a reveal profile. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs.Stair Nosing. click Lines. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Level is open. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. under Floor Plans.Reveal. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. their exact location is not critical. click New ➤ Family. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Ref.rft. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. which may be any vertical surface. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click Lines. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. In the left pane of the New dialog.rfa. However. click Training Files. The new reveal profile is now complete. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . you create a host sweep profile.

4 In the New Project dialog. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu. click Lines. click Browse. click Training Files. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. However. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. Create a new project 1 On the File menu.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. click Create. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. click New ➤ Project. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise.rte.rfa. their exact location is not critical. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. The new host sweep profile is now complete. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. 622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click OK. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 2 In the New Project dialog.Host Sweep.

expand Elevations. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. 14 In the Type Selector. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 . expand Views (all). 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Open.Sweep. enter Sweep for Name. click . and double-click South. 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. and click OK. 13 In the Open dialog.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 11 On the Design Bar.Sweep. click Finish Path. Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. the exact location of the path is not critical. click Finish Family. select it. click Sketch 2D Path. select Generic Models for Family Category. Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. click Load Profiles. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar. navigate to the location of Profile . select Profile . 17 On the View toolbar. beside Load Profiles. click Ref Plane. 7 In the Name dialog. 10 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 16 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 15 On the Design Bar.rfa. 9 On the Design Bar.

rte. click OK. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 2 In the New Project dialog. on the Options Bar. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Finish Family. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the View toolbar. select Profile Is Flipped. click New ➤ Project. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. 25 Click OK. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. click Browse. 26 On the Design Bar. The sweep profile application is now complete. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 Select the sweep profile again and. on the Options Bar. 4 In the New Project dialog. Under Other. click . 22 Select the sweep profile and. click Wall. Under Constraints. and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. click Edit.

8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Draw four walls as shown. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the View toolbar. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 . verify that Horizontal is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. click .NOTE When you draw the walls. 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. their exact location is not critical.

click . Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and click OK. click Spin [Shift]. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu. 20 In the Dynamic View dialog. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile.12 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the New dialog. select it. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. . under Construction.rfa. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click OK.rft. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Host Sweep for Profile. and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Open dialog. select Profile . floor and ceiling finish. and area with labels added to extract project data. you create a room tag which displays room name. click Edit/New. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.Host Sweep : Profile . Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. and click Open. 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. navigate to the location of Profile . 15 Select the wall sweep and. click 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. click Training Files.Host Sweep. 19 On the View toolbar. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. on the Options Bar. you specify the room tag parameters.

23 In the Select Parameter dialog. 16 Zoom in on the label. select Label : 2mm. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. click Label. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. enter 2mm for Name. click OK. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Underline. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. select Area. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type properties dialog. 12 In the Type Selector. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. and click OK. clear Underline. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. select Floor Finish. click Duplicate. select Ceiling Finish. select Name. and click OK. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. click . Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 . 8 In the Name dialog. 17 In the Type Selector. click Label. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

rfa. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. In the left pane of the New dialog. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. click Lines. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click Training Files. 3 On the Options Bar. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. The new room tag is now ready for use. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . notice that there is only one view available. and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point.rft. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. click .

click Modify. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. click .5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 . 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 10 On the Design Bar.

click New. and click OK. 16 In the Type Selector. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. 9 On the File menu. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. 2 In the New Project dialog. and click OK. 7 Click OK. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 12 In the Object Styles dialog. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . in the North Line row. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. click Modify.rfa. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. click OK. click Object Styles. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. and select the upper vertical line. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. select North Line. select 3 for Line Weight. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. under Modify Subcategories. 17 On the Design Bar.rte. Training North Arrow. click Browse. click Sheet. click New ➤ Project. select A1 metric. 4 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. click Training Files. enter North Line for Name. click Modify.

graphics. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric. text. and click Open. 14 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 . Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. select Training North Arrow. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. select it.rfa.rft.10 In the Open dialog. 12 In the Type Selector. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. click New ➤ Titleblock. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. The titleblock has linework. click Modify. In the left pane of the New dialog. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. and labels. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. and your project data. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. click Symbol. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and click to draw a new vertical line.Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . and enter 140 for Offset. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. and enter -25 for Offset. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. click . 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. and click . . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset.

click Modify. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. enter 30 for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 13 In the Type Selector. select Title Blocks. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 . 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. click . press CTRL. 16 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. click Lines.12 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. and enter 20 for Offset. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 17 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. select Wide Lines.

and open Common\Company Logo.jpg. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New.The titleblock linework is now complete. click . click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. you add a company logo. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. and labels to your titleblock. click Text. 4 Zoom in on the logo. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . text notes. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. click Import/Link ➤ Image.

in the text box. enter 10mm Bold for Name. select Text : 8mm. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. and click OK. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. and drag the text note down as shown. under Text. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and select Bold. and add an address and phone number as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK twice.9 In the Name dialog. 18 Select the drag handle. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 . and select the last text note. enter 10 for Text Size.

19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. address. 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and select the consultant text note. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Text. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. click . and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. select Constrain and Multiple. Add consultant name.

27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 .

37 Draw a text box in the next space up. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. and enter Checked By:. click Text. enter 5mm for Name. 638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select Text : 5mm. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. under Text. and enter Sheet Number:. 32 In the Name dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 5 for Text Size. and enter Date:.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. and enter Drawn By:. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and click OK. 34 Click OK twice.

Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. select Project Issue Date. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. and click OK. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the label location. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. click Label. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 .

select Checked By and click OK. click Edit/New. 53 In the Name dialog. and click to specify the label location. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. enter 15mm Label for Name. click Center and Middle. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. click Label. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. select Drawn By. and click OK.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. select Label : 15mm Label. 640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Duplicate. 50 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the label location. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 15 for Text Size. under Text. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. click . and click to specify the label location. and click OK. select Project Number. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. select Sheet Number. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 59 On the Options Bar. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 55 Click OK twice.

67 In the Select Parameter dialog.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Project Name. and click OK. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 . and click to specify the label location. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Client Name. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label.

click Sheet. 77 On the Options Bar. under Text. select File Path. and click to specify the label location. 75 Click OK twice. click Training Files. The titleblock graphics. click Modify. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 74 In the Type Properties dialog.70 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Open dialog. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 2 In the New Project dialog. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Edit/New. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. text.rfa file. select it. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load. click Left and Middle. 4 In the New Project dialog. click New ➤ Project. click Browse. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu.rfa. and click OK. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise.rte. click Duplicate. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 80 On the Design Bar. 73 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click . enter 4mm Label. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. and click Open. and labels are now complete. 9 Click OK. select 4mm Label. click OK. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. enter 4 for Text Size.

Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 2005 for Project Issue Date. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. click . Enter In Progress for Project Status. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Modify and select the titleblock. under Other. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 16 Click OK. click Project Information. 14 On the Settings menu. enter Name for Drawn By. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 . 11 On the Options Bar. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. Enter Office Building for Project Name.

Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. click Project Units. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. on the Settings menu. and open Common\c_Pantheon. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. To change the units of measurement to meters. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. In the left pane of the Open dialog. set the Area to Square meters. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Training Files. and set the suffix to None.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. click Orient ➤ Southeast. Set the Length units to millimeters. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise.rvt. you create the dome roof with a revolved form.

and click OK. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 . select Section: Wall Section . select Pick a Plane. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. select Roofs for Family Category. and double-click South. expand Elevations. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click Create. 2 In the Project Browser.Center. and click OK. and click OK. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. expand Views (all).Next. enter Dome for Name. 7 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. click Set Work Plane. 5 In the Name dialog. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. 10 In the Go To View dialog. 8 In the Work Plane dialog.

13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click . and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Axis. click . 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar. 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar.The center wall section view is displayed. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar.

The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. and select Chain. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. click . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 . Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. 19 On the Options Bar. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections.17 Move the cursor out.

28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. select Delete Inner Segment. 23 On the Options Bar. click . The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. click Lines. 27 On the Options Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. click . 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown.

click and select Chain. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. 32 On the Options Bar. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 . and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. click . and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint.

2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 41 On the Design Bar.The dome roof closed profile is now complete. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. click . click for Material. click OK. click Finish Sketch. click Revolution Properties. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. click Finish Family. 42 On the View toolbar. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. and click OK. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. 650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click Create. 38 In the Materials dialog. 40 On the Design Bar. select Floors for Family Category. select Concrete . The dome roof in-place family is now complete.

click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. double-click South. 7 In the Work Plane dialog. and click Open View. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.3 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Go To View dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. select Pick a Plane. select Section: Wall Section . 11 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations.Center. click Axis. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 . and click OK. enter Concave Floor for Name. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Set Work Plane.

652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown.O. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. and select Chain. Footing level line and the axis. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. click Lines. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. 14 On the Options Bar. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar.

Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families. Based on the template you select. click OK. Appendix A . such as reference planes and sub-categories.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. double-click 3D Section View.18 Specify the intersection of the T. and click OK.O. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Finish Family. When you create a new family. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. you start with the selection of a family template. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. the new family has specific default contents. click Finish Sketch. and title blocks. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click for Material. 24 On the Design Bar. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. annotation families. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. 22 In the Materials dialog.Exploring Family Templates | 653 .O. Appendix A . click Revolution Properties. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. select Cobblestone for Name.

Post Family template for posts of balusters. 654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: None Baluster . Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework.Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates. The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *.rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views.

is used to create 2D detail components. Includes the filled region tool. If a column intersects a wall. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family.Template Name *. Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls. includes the filled region tool. the column inherits the material of the wall. Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 . contains a reference line and left and right reference planes.rft Description Column Family template to create columns.

Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families.Template Name *. 656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project.rft Door . Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors.Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls. Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families.

Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families. Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families.Template Name *. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Contains sample wall geometry.rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families. Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 . Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families.

Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project. Contains sample floor geometry. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry.Template Name *. Contains a sample ceiling geometry.

Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion.Template Name *. Contains sample roof geometry. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry.rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Includes the filled region tool. Model Family Templates | 659 .

Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures.rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains sample roof geometry. Contains sample floor geometry. Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures.Template Name *. Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.

The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 .rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project. Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based. Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains sample wall geometry.Template Name *. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based.

Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library. and gross floor areas. Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. gross surface area. Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls. Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry. Masses can report gross volume. Contains sample ceiling geometry.Template Name *. slabs. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces.

Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families.Template Name *. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 . Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Contains sample wall geometry.rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families.

Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps. gutter. Category: Profiles. A profile is only used in combination with system families. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Category: Profiles. Category: Profiles. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile usage (fascia. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. Category: Profiles. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. slab edge.Template Name *. Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals. A profile is only used in combination with system families. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. mullion. Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts.

Category: Profiles. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family. Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families. Contains sample wall geometry. The family has an rpc file link included. Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families.Template Name *. Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 .rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing. A profile is used only in combination with system families.

Template Name *. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. If a structural column intersects a wall. 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete. specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. such as beams and braces. Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools. Spot Lighting Fixture wall based.Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols. Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. the column cuts out the wall. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column. Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures. Beams can be placed on structural columns. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Spot Lighting Fixture roof based.rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing . specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined.

Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 .rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing .Template Name *. Category: Structural Framing Window .Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls. Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side. such as trusses.Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families.

Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations.rft Window Description Family template for windows. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag. Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags. The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *. Category: Callouts Family template for door tags. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads. text size. Thus. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .0mm has a size of 2. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags. text. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. filled regions.rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Annotation families are scale-dependent. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.0mm on a plotted sheet. Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. Annotation families consist mainly of lines. and parameters. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations. Symbol size. Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Template Name *. parameter text created with a text height of 2.

rft ■ D .17 x 11.Template Name *.rft ■ E1 . In the Select a Titleblock dialog. You import images to your title block.rft ■ B .rft Metric ■ A0 metric. Imperial ■ A .5. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes. Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border. Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks.rft ■ A2 metric. all loaded title block families are listed for selection.42 x 30.rft ■ A1 metric. and parameters.rft ■ New Site Metric. filled regions.rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet. text. Category: View Titles Family template for window tags.24 x 18. In a project.rft ■ C .rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 . the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.11 x 8.rft ■ A3 metric.rft ■ A4 metric.36 x 24.

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

In exercises that become increasingly complex. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. assigned subcatecories. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. At the end of this tutorial. formula-based parameters. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor.Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. not specifically how to make a floor truss. methodology. The truss also has multiple types. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. you will understand the process. and detail level controls. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. In this case. 671 . During this tutorial.

Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. In this case. Although this solution is possible. It should also be an available option within a beam system. beams. a generic floor-based component might work. and also works intuitively with them. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. this must be a structural beam component. In this case. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. Take this into consideration during your design planning.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. you determine the requirements of the new component. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. Two types should be created. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . In addition. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. For training purposes. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. it is not the best solution. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. NOTE When creating a new family. and structural walls. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. For every complexity added to a family. you should avoid over-designing the component. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. In the next exercise. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. In this lesson. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design.

you determined that the component type is a structural beam. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. In addition. the planning stage and questions may differ. In the previous exercise. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. such as wood type. Selecting the Family Template | 673 . ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. 4 Continue with the next exercise.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. would require Instance or Type parameters. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. Depending on the family you are designing.

You should be in the Metric Templates folder. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. click Training Files. ■ Metric Structural Framing . this is where you access family templates. In addition. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. for example: wall based or floor based. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. On the right side of the New dialog. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you will access them from the Training Files folder. Select it so that the preview displays. Like most generic family templates. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. scroll to the structural framing templates. However. notice the preview. 6 In the New dialog. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog. 4 Scroll through the various template options.Beams and Braces. and open Metric\Templates.rft. Usually.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. There are two structural framing templates provided.

Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. 10 Maximize the view. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).Beams and Braces.Complex and Trusses. ■ Metric Structural Framing . it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. and notice the preview. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref.This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . Because of its simplicity. This template is the best starting point for the new family.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses.rft to open it. and display functions required by structural beams. Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 .rft and notice the preview.rft. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. spacing. Level. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. Floor Plan: Ref.Complex and Trusses.Beams and Braces.

double-click Front. however. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. under Floor Plans. under Elevations. Like many templates. Reference Plane: Left. double-click View 1. Level. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. under 3D Views.In this view. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. Therefore. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. 11 In the Project Browser. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. double-click Ref. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. you add reference planes to the beam design. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. you add the reference planes. 12 In the Project Browser. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. lines. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed.

■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. notice the location of the beam extents. In the image below. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 . In the project plan view image below. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to.

678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Before adding new reference planes. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. click . Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). In a later exercise.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). click Ref Plane.

and specify an Offset of 38 mm. click . 13 On the Design Bar. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 14 On the Options Bar. Adding Reference Planes | 679 . click to place it. double-click Front. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. To do this. click on the Edit toolbar. and select the Level: Ref. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser.Add ref. Level as the mirror axis. click Ref Plane. under Elevations. Level. click Ref Plane. Level. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. 10 On the Design Bar. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it.

680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 200 mm. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. 19 On the Options Bar. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. click to place it as shown. click to place it as shown. Before you move on to the next exercise.

and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 238 mm. 22 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. Level. 24 In the Project Browser. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. which you do in the next exercise. Adding Reference Planes | 681 . click to place it as shown. double-click Ref. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right).

you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below. Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. and click Save.25 On the Design Bar. 26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. In the following exercise. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 28 In the Save As dialog. You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. navigate to the folder of your choice. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Make sure you remember where you saved it.

rfa. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. Wood Floor Truss. 6 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. 2 On the Options Bar. After adding the dimension. click Dimension. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. click Dimension. click .

684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. place the dimension to the left as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. Place the dimension as shown.7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. click Dimension. Level. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. and the lower horizontal reference plane. double-click Front. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. the Center reference plane.

place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 . 15 Add four dimensions as shown.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. and place it below the dimension you added previously. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. add two dimensions as shown. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase.

You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. If the component has material that varies per component. consider making it a type parameter. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. 686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. consider making it an instance parameter. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. In addition. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Wood Floor Truss. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686. it becomes a parameter. In this exercise.rfa. Level. double-click Ref. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. and constraints as needed. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. Throughout the tutorial. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. When you design a new family. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. under Floor Plans. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. consider making it a type parameter. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. dimensions. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. you will add additional reference planes.

■ Click OK. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 . select Family parameter. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. Under Parameter Data. Select Type. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 7 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Family parameter. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. enter Depth for Name. Click OK. enter Chord Width for Name. select Add parameter for Label. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Add parameter for Label.3 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The rim joist was added as a beam. a slab. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end.Southeast Isometric. expand 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser. a wood sill. click Beam. 6 Using point-to-point insertion. 5 On the Options Bar. This project consists of foundation walls. therefore. expand Views.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. right-click in the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click Structural. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. double-click Level 1. and double-click 3D . and a wood rim joist. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 . 4 In the Type Selector. verify that Chain is not selected. TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active.

710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under 3D Views.NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. You do not need to be precise. double-click 3D . not the wall or rim joist.Southeast Isometric. 7 In the Project Browser. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. under Floor Plans. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square.

13 In the Save as dialog.Southeast Isometric. 12 On the File menu. click Undo Drag. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 . In the next lesson. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. double-click 3D . click Save as. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family.10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Edit menu. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. under 3D Views. This should return the project to its original dimension.

Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. Because the family is already open. double-click Ref. 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. click Training Files. 712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 4 On the View Control Bar. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. click Hide/Isolate. 2 In the Project Browser. “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. click Edit Family. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Yes. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. 5 On the File menu. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. Level. and click Hide Element. This will aid in the placement of the wood web.rfa is the active file. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. under Floor Plans. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. Adding a Nested Component In this exercise.rfa. 15 On the Options Bar.

click Component. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. under Elevations. Do not select it. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter.This family is a single extrusion as shown. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. Adding a Nested Component | 713 . Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. click Modify. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. double-click Front. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. 7 In the Type Selector. You will align the left web component first. 13 For the align-to point. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. 10 In the Project Browser. In the following steps. Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL. This will make aligning the wood web easier. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges.

18 Add two reference planes as shown. Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. click Ref Plane. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. click Modify. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. In addition. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints.14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown.

click Dimension. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. 23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.19 On the Tools menu. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. click Align. 25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 . In the steps that follow.

Place the dimension as shown. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Save As dialog. “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716. length. click Add. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. click Save As. under Parameters. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. you label these dimensions. Place the dimension as shown. you add new parameters to control the web components. or the width of the center chase. 2 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. 27 On the File menu. click Modify. 26 On the Design Bar. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . ■ In the next exercise. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth.

NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. Select Common for Discipline. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. 5 Click OK. Select Type. enter Depth . Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. and click OK. click Modify. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 . and click Element Properties. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. 4 In the Family Types dialog. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. 12 On the Design Bar. under Parameter Data. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button.3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select WebDepth. Click OK. under Other. click OK. under Constraints. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. Select Length for Type. click Edit/New. In addition.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. In the Type Properties dialog. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component.

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

22 On the File menu. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. 400. under 3D Views. click Edit Family. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog. select m_WWF3. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. and click Yes. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. 350. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. click Family Types. 14 In the Reload Family dialog. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 . 20 On the Design Bar. click Save. Notice the two beam types. under Dimensions. 18 In the Type Selector. 286. select Override parameter values of existing types. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. if(Length < 7500. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. <result-if-true>. click Modify.Southeast Isometric. and click OK. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise.TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. click Load into Projects. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog. 16 In the Type Selector. 400))) 6 Click Apply. 21 In the Project Browser. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. select 64x38. double-click 3D . if(Length < 9000.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739. select 89x38.

double-click 3D . and click Yes. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. click Save. and click Apply. 8 In the Family Types dialog. 16 On the File menu. 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 17 Close any open files.rvt. double-click Level 1. select m_WWF3. Notice the truss depth increases. under 3D Views. You have completed this tutorial. click Apply. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. click Load into Projects. select Override parameter values of existing types.Southeast Isometric. enter 6000 for length. and click OK. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. 11 In the Reload Family dialog. enter 8000 for length. and click OK. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

To change grids. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. This affects the entire curtain system. and they are not windows. panel. Unlike windows. To switch panel types. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. 743 . and mullions. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. you need to select a panel.Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. Like windows. and you can change these elements individually. to resize the system. or you can use a specific curtain system command. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you select the grid. For example. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. you need to change the length of the wall. grid lines. Like walls. A typical curtain system comprises a wall.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. click Wall. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls.rvt. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Ground Floor. you create a curtain system using the wall command. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .Flat Curtain System In this lesson. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor.

6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 745 . 8 In the Project Browser. and double-click Southeast Isometric. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.

Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. Click OK. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. using curtain grids. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. under Floor Plans. enter 1200. and click (Properties).11 Select the curtain system. double-click GROUND FLOOR. top constraint. 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and room bounding. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. For Top Offset. top and base attachments. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof.

FOURTH FLOOR. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 26 While pressing CTRL. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view.a. click Elevation. and resize the crop boundary as shown. and click Rename. while pressing CTRL. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. SIXTH FLOOR. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. THIRD FLOOR.15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. FIFTH FLOOR. right-click Elevation 1 . and click OK. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. Creating an Entrance | 747 . 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. click Modify. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 18 In the Project Browser. select SECOND FLOOR. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 25 On the Design Bar. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. click Curtain Grid. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. one larger than the other. 33 On the Design Bar. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Click to create a vertical grid. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. click Modify. click Curtain Grid. Click to place another grid line.

The segment line style changes to dashed. click Add or Remove Segments. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. Instead of using the Door command. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. The two segments are removed. Creating an Entrance | 749 . and on the Options Bar. you add a doorway to the curtain system. 35 Select the left vertical grid line.Next. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. and then select the segment above it.

38 Using the same method. click Curtain Grid. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. and lock them. select One Segment. 750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. 42 Place dimensions as shown.

You will have to press TAB to highlight it. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel.rfa. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. click Modify.43 Delete the dimensions. The panel changes to a double door. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 54 On the Design Bar. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 52 On the Type Selector. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. Creating an Entrance | 751 . Next. click in any white space to exit the editor. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. Use the following image as a guide. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click Training Files.

you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. and the solid panels display in white. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 63 Click OK twice. 752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and click Wireframe. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. under Elevations. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 61 With the panel still selected. not as curtain panels. 60 On the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. click . The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. The glazed panels display in blue. They are part of the curtain panel category. Now. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 57 On the View Control Bar. 56 In the Project Browser. This changes the graphics style of the view. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. click System Panel : Solid. double-click Entrance Elevation. click . 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 55 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. on the new curtain system you added.These panels schedule as doors. Next. 65 On the View Control Bar. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall.

Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 . 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.rvt. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 68 On the File menu. click Save As. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Grid Line. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. click Mullion. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance.66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 4 On the Options Bar. select Grid Line Segment. 2 On the Options Bar. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise.

Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. You are going to change some mullion joins. there are a few that you do not want. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 9 Delete the mullions below them. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. Two mullion join controls display. so you remove them next. select All Empty Segments. because their width reduces the size of the doors. however. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click.6 On the Options Bar.

you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 16 Save the file.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. Finally. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 14 On the Design Bar. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 13 Click the top mullion control. Curved Curtain System | 755 . The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. you can also right-click. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. click Modify. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 15 In the Project Browser. Finally. double-click Southeast Isometric. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. you add a curtain system using the wall command. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins.

6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. double-click GROUND FLOOR. enter 1200. (Arc passing through three points). select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. for Top Constraint. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 5 Click . under Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. For Top Offset. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. 7 On the Options Bar. 756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

Next. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Divide the halves into quarters. You are going to use one of these snaps points. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. double-click East. and then sixteenths. you change some panels in the system. click Modify. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . click Curtain Grid. Next. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. you place grids on the system. eighths. 14 In the Project Browser. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 16 On the Design Bar. under Elevations.

you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. double-click Exterior. 758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .rft. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select the bottom layer of panels. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. under Elevations. click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar. to filter out all other 19 Save the file. Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. enter 100. and on the Options Bar. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 5 On the Design Bar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. select Basic Wall: Generic . for Depth. 18 In the Type Selector. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. click . click Training Files. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar.300mm.

11 On the Design Bar. and click . for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 18 Load the Curtain Panel .8 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. and return to the project file. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.rfa family.Pattern. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. All fourth floor panels are selected. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. clear Chain. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar.Pattern. click Finish Sketch. select Curtain Panel . 14 On the Design Bar. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.Pattern. 19 In the Project Browser. right-click. select Glass. 9 Select the extrusion.rfa. click Modify. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 . 21 In the Type Selector. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. . click Model Lines. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

27 Highlight a panel in the arc. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. 24 On the View toolbar. and click Flip Orientation.Solid. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 29 Save the file. 28 In the Type Selector. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 26 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 23 Right-click. All the panels change to the solid panel. select System Panel . and then click (Dynamically Modify View).22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . All fifth floor panels are selected. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. right-click. under Floor Plans.

For vertical mullions. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. Select Radius. click ■ ■ For Sides. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. . 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. click Lines.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. for Profile Usage. under Elevations. select Mullion. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. double-click East. and select it. 1 In the Project Browser. click Mullion.rft. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. and enter 50 mm for the radius. click Training Files. enter 8. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 . Click again to specify the ending point.

19 On the Design Bar. it can be added as a mullion type. After the new profile is loaded. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 In the Project Browser. clear Coarse and Medium. and click OK. 30 Click . select Circular Mullion for Family. click Modify. 20 Select the detail component.11 On the Design Bar.rfa family. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. click Visibility. 28 Click . under 3D Views. and return to the project file. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . clear Fine. click Training Files.detail. click Mullion. 13 On the Options Bar. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify.rfa. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 17 On the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click Visibility. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click Detail Component. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. and click OK.

42 Press DELETE. 43 Save the file. so you remove the unwanted ones. and then apply those custom elements to the system. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 40 In the Project Browser. you learned to create a curved curtain system. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. In this lesson. and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. You have placed more mullions than you want.32 Click Edit/New. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 37 On the Options Bar. select All Empty Segments. under Floor Plans. 34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc. right-click. 36 Click OK twice. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. for Profile. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . click Modify. 35 Under Construction. click Duplicate.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. click Roof Properties. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. TIP To chain select all the walls.Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 4 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 5 On the Options Bar. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. and you can click to select them all. and press TAB. enter 600. double-click TOP OF ROOF. and a ruled curtain system. click Pick Walls. a storefront system. 7 On the Design Bar. 764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 9 On the Design Bar. All the inside faces highlight. Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family.

double-click GROUND FLOOR. 14 On the Options Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.10 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. select Entire Grid Line. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Storefront System | 765 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Floor Plans. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. Storefront System In this exercise. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. click Mullion. 18 Save the file. double-click Southeast Isometric.

and enter 2400. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . click Wall. 5 On the Options Bar.You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. select Unconnected for Height.

even if the wall height changes. enter 10200 mm. 12 Select the storefront wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. 10 In the Project Browser.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. and click . 8 Click the temporary dimension. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. under 3D Views. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. double-click Southeast Isometric. For this wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. and press ENTER. This specifies an exact length for the wall. To see how the grid layout is defined. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. click Edit/New. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. click Modify. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. Storefront System | 767 . which is specified in the type. 9 On the Design Bar. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm.

The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. select All Empty Segments. By setting the Angle value. enter 15. you find Number. 19 Select a curtain grid. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 20 Save the file. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. and Offset. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. see the Revit Architecture help. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 1 In the Project Browser. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. double-click Southeast Isometric. 16 Click OK. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. click Mullion. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. under 3D Views. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. center. 18 On the Options Bar.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. or end. Angle. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Justification.

4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click the highlighted line. and highlight the model line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Curtain System by Lines | 769 .

Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. click Curtain Grid. quarters. 11 Click OK. and click . 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 10 Select the panel. A panel between the 2 lines is created. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. Next. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. and then eighths. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.8 Select the highlighted line. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. Finally. and define a ruled curtain system. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 16 In the Type Selector. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. select System Panel : Solid. 18 Save the file. right-click. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. quarters. and then eighths. Curtain System by Lines | 771 . and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems.

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

and soffits to the roofs that you create. In addition. gutters.Roofs 19 In this tutorial. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008. you learn how to add fascia. 773 .

including hip. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. select Name. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Go To View dialog. You do not need to create the work plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and mansard roofs. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. In this lesson.rvt. expand Views (all). 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. click Training Files. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. and open Metric\m_Roofs. gable. you learn to create several different types of roofs. 4 Click OK.Creating Roofs In this lesson. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. Before you can sketch the roof profile. shed. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. and double-click Level 1. verify that Section: Section1 is selected.

The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. click Ref Plane. click the blue square on the witness line. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 . 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and so on). you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch.

click Lines.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. select Chain. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. sketch the roof profile.

and then select the exterior face of the wall. Next. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. press TAB. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 16 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Tools toolbar. click . use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 17 On the Tools toolbar. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. click . Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. The roof should resemble the following illustration.The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. click to display the model.

26 On the View toolbar. press CTRL. and double-click Section 1. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 778 | Chapter 19 Roofs .The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Modify. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. expand Sections (Type 1). 21 In the Project Browser. click Attach for Top/Base. and select the second wall. expand Views (all). 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint.

1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. 6 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. m_Roofs. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 . 2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. By default.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. Next. click . verify that Defines slope is selected. 7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. clear Defines slope. 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. select both slope definition lines.rvt. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 9 Press CTRL.

When you complete the roof.rvt. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 12 When you see the informational dialog. clear Defines slope. 13 On the View toolbar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.10 In the Element Properties dialog. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. click Pick Walls. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. m_Roofs. click Finish Roof. and enter 600 for Overhang. 3 On the Options Bar. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. expand Views (all). under Dimensions. expand Floor Plans. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. and double-click Level 3. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.

11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. click Lines. 10 On the View menu. 9 Using automatic snaps. 6 Click to select all the walls. click . select Defines Slope. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. press TAB. Next. click Modify. Next. add new slope lines to the roof. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 . 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. sketch the chimney opening.

click Finish Roof. click Pick Walls. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. close the roof sketch. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs . select Defines Slope. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. select Defines slope. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 3 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782.15 On the Options bar. click to view the new roof in the model. m_Roofs. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. and double-click Level 2. Next. 1 In the Project Browser. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 18 On the View toolbar. 17 When you see the informational dialog.

trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Next. click . 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. select the left vertical slope definition line. click Roof Properties. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. and click . Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 16 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Under Constraints. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 . 9 On the Tools toolbar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 11 To trim the first line segment. using the following illustration for guidance. Next. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. clear Defines Slope. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. and click OK. click Lines. click Finish Roof. 10 On the Options Bar. click to display the model.6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar.

and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 18 On the Design Bar. 784 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Next. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. click Modify. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. click . 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar.17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.

3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. expand Views (all). “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785.The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. enter 0 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls.rvt. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. press TAB. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and enter 300 for Overhang. 6 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. clear Defines Slope. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 . expand Floor Plans. m_Roofs.

you add a slope-defining line. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. select the left vertical roof line. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. and press ENTER. 16 Under Constraints. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. click . click Roof Properties. click Modify. and click OK. Next. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 786 | Chapter 19 Roofs .7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch.

6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 .21 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 7 On the Options Bar. click . expand Views (all). click Ref Plane. and double-click Level 2. 9 On the Tools menu. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. m_Roofs. 3 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. add two new slope arrows. To help locate the position of each split. Next. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. verify is selected. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 14 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. Next. 5 On the View menu. and double-click 3D. and enter 600 for Offset. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. expand 3D Views. click Split Walls and Lines. Before you can add slope arrows. you need to add two reference planes. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. click Modify. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. click Slope Arrow. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.

15 to add the second slope arrow. When you sketch a hip roof.15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 20 Under Dimensions. 23 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. expand Floor Plans. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. select both slope arrows. and double-click Garage Roof. select Slope for Specify. 18 Press CTRL. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. When eave heights differ. 5 On the Options Bar. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. m_Roofs. and then click OK. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. expand Views (all). “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs . enter 500 for Rise/1000. 1 In the Project Browser. select Defines Slope. the adjacent eave heights must align. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Edit. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and click 19 Under Constraints. .

and save the exercise file with a unique name. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.6 With the two gable end lines selected. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. under Dimensions. When aligning eaves. “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the View toolbar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 If you want to save your changes. and click OK. click Save As. 12 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. click . you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. The eave lines display with a dimension. select a method to align the eaves. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to display the model. on the File menu. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. click Finish Roof. click Align Eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Next. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 .

3 Select the roof and. expand Elevations. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click North.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. on the Options Bar. 6 On the View toolbar. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click Modify. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click to display the model. click . click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. under Constraints. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.

13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. on the File menu. and then select Defines slope. under Dimensions. click Lines. and save the exercise file with a unique name. After you create a roof. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. press TAB. and soffits in Revit Architecture. 7 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.Next. and click OK. gutters. Creating Fascia. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 If you want to save your changes. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Modify. click Finish Roof. and Soffits | 791 . you learn how to create roof fascia. click . gutters. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. and double-click Level 3. and soffits. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating Fascia. expand Views (all). 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click . Gutters. you can easily create its fascia. 17 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and Soffits In this lesson. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save As. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the remaining three lines. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. Gutters.

1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.rfa. select M_Fascia-Built-Up.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. and click OK twice.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Press CTRL. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. click Training Files. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. under Construction. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open. and click OK. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs . enter Built-up Fascia. click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium. click Training Files. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click .rvt.

rvt.13 On the Design Bar. and click OK three times. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Properties dialog. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. under Construction. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 Click to place the gutter. 2 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. c_Condominium. and click OK. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. . click Modify to exit the Fascia command. click in the Value field for Material. click Edit/New. click . click Duplicate. Creating Gutters | 793 . click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. Creating Gutters In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 6 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Pick Roofs. and double-click Roof. 4 Select the roof. 794 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 3 On the Design Bar. Creating Soffits In this exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. “Creating Soffits” on page 794. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. c_Condominium. expand Floor Plans. expand Views.rvt.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

7 On the Tools menu. and double-click 3D. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 8 Select the roof. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 6 In the Project Browser. on the File menu. Creating Soffits | 795 .5 On the Design Bar. and then select the soffit to join them. click Join Geometry. 9 If you want to save your changes. expand 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. click Save As. expand Views (all).

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. 797 . Finally. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans.

For Unit Suffix. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. and open Common\c_Area. 4 In the Project Units dialog. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. and click Room and Area. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. select Square meters. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Views (all). you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. select 2 decimal places. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. click Project Units. For Rounding. Click OK. click Training Files. your values will be different.rvt. 2 In the Project Units dialog. under Length. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. click Settings. select m2 Click OK. click the Area Schemes tab. expand Floor Plans. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. In the final exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click OK. For Unit Suffix. These schemes define spatial relationships. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. If you are using metric units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. select mm. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. select Millimeters. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . 3 Under Area.

the system-computed height defaults to the level. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). 13 In the Project Browser. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. If you select No. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. Click OK. click the Room Calculations tab. click Area Plan. forming a closed loop. it is not necessary in this exercise. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). 9 Click Cancel. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 .Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. When you select Yes in this dialog. under Views (all). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. you must manually add these boundary lines. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. 12 When the informational dialog displays. or 0. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated.

17 In the New Area Plan dialog. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. rather than the area tag. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. you must select one of the reference lines. and store area. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. click Area. Next. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. Click OK. common areas. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. click Area Plan. To modify the area. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas.

When you add area boundary lines. click Area. If you do not select this option. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 21 On the Options Bar. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). you can either draw them or pick them. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). When you pick the walls. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model.Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 . click Area Boundary. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass.

NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model.25 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . Click OK. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click . 32 On the Options Bar. and click to select the area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click . 29 On the Design Bar. click Area. 27 On the Options Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 31 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify and select the area.

Click OK. and select Store Area for Area Type. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model.33 In the Element Properties dialog. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 . In the Element Properties dialog. Select Office area for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Click OK. enter Core for Name. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right.

You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. click Save. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 37 On the File menu.Notice that within the two store areas. click Color Scheme Legend. In the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click to place the legend.rvt. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . name the project Area-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click Save. In this exercise.

3 When the dialog displays. under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. select Area Type and click Add. 7 Under Available fields. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 . 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 9 Click OK. click the Fields tab. and click OK. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Areas (Rentable). click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

After you make building elements. 807 . At any time. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. curtain systems. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. floors. If you modify a massing face. and roofs. you then need to update the building face. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. In this tutorial. you can specify the view to display massing elements.Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. or both. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. building elements. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click Massing. and floors. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. click Create Mass. double-click Level 1. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. and cutting geometry. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. sweeps. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. roofs. under Views (all). Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. You assign the default wall. floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1.

on the Options Bar. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. click .6 On the Sketch Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Extrusion Properties. 19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click 17 On the Options Bar. 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. and then click . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 . under Floor Plans. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 10 In the Materials dialog. under Constraints. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. on the Options Bar. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. under Materials and Finishes. under Views (all). click Lines. and click OK. click the Value for Material. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. and click OK. 13 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 8 On the Design Bar. click Lines.

select Pick a plane. and click OK. 30 Click to select the face. highlight the larger form. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. under Constraints. 27 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 810 | Chapter 21 Massing . 24 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. and then click . under Materials and Finishes. 28 In the Work Plane dialog. under Views (all). TIP If necessary. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. The second form is on top of the first form. Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click West. 22 In the Materials dialog. click the Value for Material. double-click {3D} to see the results. and click OK. 20 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 29 In the drawing area. 25 In the Project Browser.

and click on the Options Bar. click . 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and click to select the line start point. Next. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 33 On the Options Bar. click . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 . 35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown.31 On the Sketch Design Bar. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 36 On the Options Bar. click Lines. TIP If you do not see this option.

. click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click 48 Create an arc as shown. and delete the vertical construction line. 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Edit toolbar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click East. 45 On the Design Bar. 39 Select the arc and the horizontal line.38 On the Design Bar. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Modify. click Lines and. 47 On the Options Bar. 44 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click Edit Top. click . . on the Options Bar.

you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 52 On the View toolbar. click . click Finish Sketch. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 . 51 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Blend Properties. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. 50 In the Element Properties dialog.49 On the Design Bar. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. In this exercise. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model.

When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 14 Click OK. click and enter 15000 for Offset. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. on the Options Bar. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. and 0 for Extrusion Start. click Extrusion Properties. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. click Lines and. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. When sketching each extrusion. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. double-click Level 1. m_Massing_Start. 1 In the Project Browser. select the mass. on the View Control Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click and select Chain. 13 Under Constraints. click Finish Sketch. click Ref Plane. 2 In the drawing area. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. 814 | Chapter 21 Massing . enter 12000 for Extrusion End. snap the corners to the intersections. under Views (all). click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 7 Using the same technique. 4 On the Options bar.rvt. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. under Floor Plans. and then click Hidden Line. as shown. 15 On the Design Bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids.

click New.rfa. click Training Files.rvt. click . enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. click Finish Mass. click Family Types. In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Apply. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 17 On the Mass Design Bar. Finally. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. you create new family types from a mass family file. 18 On the File menu. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . click Save As. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 15000 mm for Width. under Other. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box.16 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 12000 mm for Height. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. and 18000 mm for Depth. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise.

6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. 18000 mm for Height. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. and click Apply. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width.rfa. You also load other existing mass families and place them. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. click Training Files. 11000 mm for Height. 10 On the File menu. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. click Save As. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 If not already selected. and click OK. and 6000 mm for Depth. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. In this exercise. and click OK.rvt. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. and 9000 mm for Depth. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. and click Apply. Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 9 Click OK. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click . 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. Semi Barrel Vault. click Training Files. 10 On the Design Bar. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 . 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown.rfa. under Floor Plans. and click OK twice. select Rotate after placement. 11 Select the box. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. and click to place the mass.rfa. select the 3 boxes. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. 24 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. 6 Open the Box-Training. click Modify. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click . and Triangle. 16 On the Design Bar. select the triangle. Arc Dome. 17 Press CTRL. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. click Modify. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 20 In the Type Selector. 4 On the File menu. double-click Site. enter 90 for Angle.rfa family files. 14 In the Type Selector.rfa. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 25 In the drawing area. 8 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area.2 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. click Modify. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 21 On the Options Bar.

30 Place the box mass family as shown. you join these mass elements. and click OK twice. 32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. click Orient ➤ Northeast. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. click . and click OK twice. click Place Mass. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 29 In the Type Selector. 33 On the View toolbar. 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . In the next exercise. and click . In this exercise. 31 Select the box and click .26 Select the triangle. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 34 On the View menu.

click .rvt file. Joining Mass Elements | 819 . you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. 4 Select the triangle. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. NOTE When you join geometry. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. . and then press ESC to see the result.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. click 2 On the Tools toolbar.

on the Edit toolbar. double-click Site. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. enter SM. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. click 8 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click for Axis. 820 | Chapter 21 Massing .

and then select the triangle. you joined mass elements together. Joining Mass Elements | 821 . 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. click . In this exercise.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 17 Press ESC to see the result. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. . Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar.

double-click Site. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. 2 On the Window menu. clear Curved. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. and select the triangle mass element.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. select Sloped (primary). 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. do not clear the check mark. 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . 1 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar.rvt. 5 In the Project Browser. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. (If Design Options is already selected. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. enter 90 degrees for Angle. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 10 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Place Mass. click .

and click OK twice. and click .12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 23 In the Project Browser. and click Wireframe. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. under Elevations. click Modify. Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 . select the three arc domes. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. and click . 16 On the View Control Bar. click Place Mass. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. click . 18 In the Type Selector. 20 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK twice. 14 In the drawing area. double-click North. 21 In the drawing area.

click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. select Curved from the Design Option menu. and click OK. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. clear Sloped. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. click the Design Options tab. select Curved. While pressing CTRL. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. under Views (all). and watch the status bar. 32 Click the value for Design Option. 29 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. click . click . and click OK. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. 30 On the View menu. and click Wireframe. Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. TIP To find the correct shapes. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.24 On the View Control Bar. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Visibility/Graphics.

under Option. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. click . and click Close. 34 In the Design Options dialog. you pick massing faces to create walls. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Curved and. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. 35 Close the warning that displays. click Training Files. 36 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Make Primary. In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. you placed mass elements into Design Options.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.rvt. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options.rvt. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 . you can make it the primary option.

under Views (all). 9 On the Design Bar.Brick on CMU. double-click Level 3. click to show the massing model. select Basic Wall: Exterior . under Floor Plans. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. click Wall by Face. 2 On the View toolbar. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 3 On the View menu. 826 | Chapter 21 Massing . under Views (all). click Wall by Face. click Orient ➤ Southeast. click . Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector.1 In the Project Browser. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 8 In the Project Browser.

Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 . 15 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 5. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Wall by Face. double-click Level 1. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. 12 On the Design Bar.NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. under Views (all). 16 In the Type Selector. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 14 In the Project Browser. 18 Select all the faces shown in red.

If desired. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls.You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 828 | Chapter 21 Massing . Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. click . and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 9. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. you pick massing faces to create floors. In this exercise. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 20 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. and click Wireframe. click Wall by Face.

and Walls. Curtain Systems.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 . click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). clear Curtain Panels. click Floor Area Faces. select all levels. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 2 On the View menu.rvt. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Click OK.

and click OK. click Orient ➤ Northeast. select Levels 1-4. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 10 Press CTRL. 9 On the View menu. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 830 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Floor Area Faces. 12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog.8 On the Design Bar.

click Floor Area Faces. double-click Level 1. 16 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. clear Exclude Options. 14 On the Options Bar. 23 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click . verify that Select Multiple is selected. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 . click Create Floors. click Floor by Face. 18 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog.13 On the Design Bar. 15 Press CTRL. select Level 1. 20 On the Options Bar. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. click Modify. under Floor Plans. under Views (all).

In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create roofs. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. 832 | Chapter 21 Massing .24 In the Project Browser. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. under Schedules/Quantities. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. double-click Mass Schedule.

rvt. click Create Roof. click Roof by Face. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser.400mm. double-click {3D}. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Create Roof. 4 In the Type Selector. select Basic Roof : Generic .

In this exercise. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise.Your model should now look as shown. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. Curtain Systems. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. click Visibility/Graphics. click Create Roof. and then click OK. and Walls. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. select Curtain Panels. 11 On the View menu. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 834 | Chapter 21 Massing . 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element.

be sure that Select Multiple is selected. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create System. 6 On the Options Bar.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 5 Press CTRL. double-click {3D}. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. under Views (all). and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. click Curtain System by Face. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Creating Curtain Systems | 835 . 3 In the Type Selector.

7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. 836 | Chapter 21 Massing . select the blended form on the in-place mass. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

9 On the Options Bar. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 . 10 Click Modify to exit the command. In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. click Create System.

4 Select the box mass family as shown and click .Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 838 | Chapter 21 Massing . 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Curtain Panels. and click OK. click Duplicate. Curtain Systems. click Edit/New. click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. Floors. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 30000 for Width. under Views (all). 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Roofs. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Next. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the View menu. and then click OK. and Walls. click Visibility/Graphics.

11 On the Options Bar. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. click Modify. clear Exclude Options. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 .10 On the Design Bar.

The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. under Views (all). In the next steps. 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. you want to select the smaller one. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 840 | Chapter 21 Massing . TIP To select the curtain wall. 19 On the View toolbar. click Remake. click . Also.

you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors. 20 Select the roof as shown.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. 21 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 . click Remake.

Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. and click Remake.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. 842 | Chapter 21 Massing . you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. 1 Open the 3D view. you changed the size of an existing mass family. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. In this exercise.

click All to select all categories. click Visibility/Graphics. 9 Select Mass. 8 Click None to clear the selection. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 . Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.Massing only. and click OK. right-click on the 3D view. 4 Rename the view 3D . The 3D view now shows only the building shell.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. 7 Clear one of the check boxes.

You might create the model shown. such as columns and an extruded roof.In this exercise. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. 844 | Chapter 21 Massing . This concludes the massing tutorial. to the building shell. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. If desired.

Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you also simplify the modification process. In this tutorial. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. or with those working on a different project. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. and modify repetitive units. all instances in the building model are updated. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing.Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008. place. You can also nest groups within other groups. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. 845 . you not only simplify their placement. By grouping objects. For example.

Creating. In another exercise. expand Views (all). You mirror one instance of the group. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. After you create a model group. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping . you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. When you make changes to a nested group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. hotel rooms. and typical office layouts. the host group is also updated automatically. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. Modifying. and double-click First Floor. click Training Files. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan.rvt. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click OK. 3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen. click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen.2 Enter ZR. Creating and Placing a Group | 847 . 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify.The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 8 On the View toolbar. 848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. select the center control for the group origin. 7 On the Design Bar.

Creating and Placing a Group | 849 . under Groups. expand Model. right-click Typical Kitchen. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. and click Create Instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.

13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 850 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. clear Copy. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 851 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate). and on the toolbar.

click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. 852 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 21 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit.19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.

Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. click Save As. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. as shown. and click Save. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt. Modifying a Group | 853 . you make changes to an instance of a group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you finish editing. and one rotated. one mirrored.

press TAB to highlight the wall. and click to select the door. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. press TAB.2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. (Include group member). press TAB. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the wall. 5 Click (Exclude group member). NOTE To display an excluded element. and click to select it. 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 3 Click (Exclude group member). 7 Click (Exclude group member). and click 4 Move the cursor over the door. select the element.

click Modify. clear Tag on Placement. select Basic Wall : Generic .8 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. Modifying a Group | 855 . 12 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. click Door. click Wall. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 15 On the Options Bar. move the cursor to the left. 14 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.127mm. 13 On the Design Bar.

17 On the Design Bar. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Modify. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 21 On the Options Bar. move the cursor up. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. click Zoom To Fit. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 23 In the drawing area. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Zoom flyout. click Edit Group. 18 On the View toolbar. In edit group mode.

in the Project Browser. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. which acts as the host. and click OK. 29 In the group editor toolbar. 28 For Base Offset. and on the Options Bar. Nesting Groups In this exercise. double-click First Floor. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. click Finish. under Floor Plans.25 On the Design Bar. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. you add the Typical Kitchen group.rvt. created in an earlier lesson. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 26 Select the opening. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Constraints. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. enter 2134. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. for Unconnected Height. click Modify. click Properties. Nesting Groups | 857 . enter 1000.

4 In the group editor toolbar. 3 On the Options Bar. 858 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 5 In the drawing area.2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click (Add to Group). click Edit Group. select the Typical Kitchen group.

such as door and window tags. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. double-click Second Floor. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. In the next exercise. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. 8 In the Project Browser. such as text. you add door tags to a group. under Floor Plans. and each of the bifold doors. and filled regions. select the wall between the folding doors. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. 7 In the group editor toolbar. click Finish. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation.6 Press TAB.

under Floor Plans. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click to draw a rectangular region. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. double-click First Floor. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. click Filled Region. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. 4 On the Options Bar.

click Text. 7 On the Design Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click to add an arc leader. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click Modify.6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 12 Enter Tile. and on the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Finish Sketch. and select a point below the left elevator. Creating a Detail Group | 861 .

20 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 14 On the Edit toolbar. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. and click Create Instance. and click OK. expand Detail. as shown. and select the note and the filled region. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Modify. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. click (Group).The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. under Groups. under Floor Plans. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 16 In the drawing area. double-click Second Floor. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar.

Because the detail group contains variables. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 . click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. double-click First Floor. click Zoom To Fit. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. clear Leader.21 In the drawing area. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 22 On the Design Bar. click to place the detail group. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added.

8 In the Filter dialog. click Modify.4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click (Group). 864 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 9 On the Edit toolbar. click (Filter Selection). 7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Check None. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. select Door Tags. as shown: 5 On the Design Bar.

and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. therefore. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Place Detail. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . for Attached Detail Group Name. and click OK. double-click Second Floor. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group.

right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Modify.rvt. and click OK. for Create new. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. In this case. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 3 For File name. click New ➤ Project. click OK. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. and click Save. and click Save Group. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. When you load the group from the library into a new project. verify that Same as group name is selected. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. under Groups\Model. 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and click Open. browse to the Desktop. accept the default template file. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects.rvt.16 On the Design Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 5 In the New Project dialog. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. select 2 Bedroom Unit. verify that Project is selected. click Desktop.

rvt. click Use Existing. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. When a group is converted to a link.A warning dialog is displayed. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. and on the Options Bar. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Link. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 12 On the Design Bar. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. click Modify. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. and click Create Instance. expand Groups. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. and expand Model.

click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 20 On the Options Bar. and the link is removed. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 868 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Bind. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. select the linked Revit model. and click OK. click OK. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.17 On the Design Bar. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Remove Link. expand Revit Links. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify. 18 In the Project Browser. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 24 In the message dialog. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project.

Site 23 In this tutorial. 869 . you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project.

In the second part of this exercise. expand Views (all). The scale of this view is 1 : 100. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. you create a toposurface using two different methods. convert the data to a table. 3 On the Design Bar.Using Site Tools In this lesson. Using the first method. 4 On the Options Bar. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. and then modify the data. In the final exercises. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. right-click in the Design Bar. You add property lines manually. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. This project file was created using the default metric template. you add a building pad to the site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_First_Project. click Toposurface. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. islands. and walkways. 870 | Chapter 23 Site .rvt. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. click Point. and click Site. and double-click Site. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Creating a Toposurface | 871 . enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. 8 On the Options Bar.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.

Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. enter 1500 mm. 12 On the Settings menu. and click OK. Use the following illustration as a reference. 12000 mm. 872 | Chapter 23 Site . click Finish Surface. click Site Settings. 15000 mm. under Increment. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. 11 On the Design Bar.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. under Additional Contours. 13 In the Site Settings dialog.

23 Click the Level 1 text. under Views (all). 16 On the View toolbar. and press ENTER. click the elevation value. and press ENTER. 14 On the View toolbar. and click Shading with Edges. click . 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. Before importing the contour data. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. enter 1000 mm. and press ENTER. click to delete it. and double-click South. click Model Graphics Style. Creating a Toposurface | 873 . click Yes. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 19 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. on the Standard toolbar. rename the level Basement. 18 In the Project Browser. modify the level names and elevations. 21 Click the Level 2 text.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. click Modify.

click Modify. click Training Files. clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 31 On the Design Bar. Click Open. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 25 On the File menu. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. select Preserve colors. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 30 On the Edit menu. 29 Select the imported topography. Under Import or Link. Under Layer/Level Colors. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. it is considered an import symbol. click Pin Position. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Modify. double-click Site. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.24 In the Project Browser. Until it is exploded.

you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. and click OK. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. click the Annotation Categories tab. select it. 36 On the Design Bar. when the edges highlight.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. and then click OK. clear C_INDX. 32 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. When you select the import symbol. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. click Toposurface. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating a Toposurface | 875 . 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 34 Under Visibility. clear Elevations.

you add property lines using two methods. this project file is required in its current state. Using the second method.rvt. name the project Site-in progress. 43 On the File menu. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 39 On the Design Bar. 40 On the View toolbar. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876. click . 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. click Save As. and click Save. 876 | Chapter 23 Site . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Finish Surface. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Using the first method. 42 On the View toolbar.

Click Modify. click Lines. If you have not completed the previous exercise. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. and click OK. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. click Lines.rvt. 4 On the Design Bar. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. Select and delete the right vertical line. select Create property lines by sketching. add an arc line on the right. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. click Property Line. On the Design Bar.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Using the 3-point Arc tool. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. do so before continuing. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Site-in progress. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Adding Property Lines | 877 .

click OK. click Finish Sketch. on the Standard toolbar. click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them. 14 In the Property Lines dialog. select Edit Table. 8 On the Options Bar. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. and click OK. 9 In the warning dialog. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. click Property Line. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.6 On the Design Bar. click 12 On the Design Bar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. when they highlight. A warning dialog is displayed. 15 Starting in Row #1. select the lines. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and.

Notice that after you complete the last line.rfa. Adding Property Lines | 879 . Before adding property line segment tags. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. If the gap is not closed. 23 On the View menu. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 20 Click Load. 19 In the Tags dialog. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. 22 In the Tags dialog.dwg and click OK. click the Imported Categories tab. click to place the property lines. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 16 Click OK. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. click Visibility/Graphics. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 25 Under Visibility. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. click Training Files.

880 | Chapter 23 Site . The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. right-click in the Design Bar. click Save. 31 On the File menu. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 27 On the Options Bar. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click Shading with Edges. you created two sets of property lines. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. clear Leader. this project file is required in its current state. click Tag ➤ By Category. In the next exercise. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. click Model Graphics Style. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. click to place it. In the final step. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. 30 On the View Control Bar. In this exercise. The tags display more prominently in this view. and click Drafting. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor.

rvt. Under Line Pattern. and click Wireframe. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. select Working Contour. select Dash dot. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. 2 On the Settings menu. click Model Graphics Style. select Single Value. click Site Settings. In the Object Styles dialog. 10 Under Additional Contours. select Topography. enter 1000. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. for Subcategory. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. click Object Styles. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. 7 Click OK. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Site-in progress. under Contour Line Display. and click OK. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. Under Subcategory. 4 Under Modify Subcategories.0 mm. Under Line Color. Under Range Type. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 . 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. enter the name Working Contour.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select a shade of Brown. click New.

you create subregions in order to define roads. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. In the next exercise.11 Click OK. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. and islands. such as material. parking areas. The object style subcategory. and islands. The next exercise requires a new dataset. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 12 On the File menu. click Close. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. 882 | Chapter 23 Site . In this exercise. you create topographic subregions to define roads. parking areas. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. Working Contour. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 . click Lines. click Training Files. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. try to replicate the location and proportion. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. click Subregion. Although the exact dimensions are not important. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. and open Metric\m_Site.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner.rvt. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. In the left pane of the Open dialog. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. 2 On the Design Bar.

8 On the Design Bar. click Shading with Edges. enter Parking for Name. under Identity Data. select Site . under Materials and Finishes. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 9 On the View menu. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. click Properties. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE In the Metric dataset. 884 | Chapter 23 Site . and click OK. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. and click OK.Tarmacadam for Name. 6 In the Materials dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. click the Value for Material.

and double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces.Tarmacadam. under Floor Plans. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. click Model Graphics Style. click Model Graphics Style. double-click Site. 12 On the View Control Bar. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Delete overlapping lines. As you create new subregions. double-click Topography Schedule. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. they display within this schedule. and click Hidden Line. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. expand Schedules/Quantities. 14 On the Options Bar. and click Shading with Edges. under Schedules/Quantities. 16 On the Design Bar. Notice that the project area has increased. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. 18 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . 17 On the View Control Bar. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. click Edit Boundary. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 . Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each.

886 | Chapter 23 Site .Grass for Name. 20 On the View Control Bar. 29 On the View Control Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 30 In the Project Browser. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.Grass for Name. and click Hidden Line. enter Island . double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 24 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. In this training project. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the upper-right parking area. and click Shading with Edges. click Model Graphics Style. under Schedules/Quantities. click the Value for Material. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. under Materials and Finishes. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. select Site . double-click Site. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 26 In the Materials dialog. click Model Graphics Style. 22 On the Design Bar. click Lines. under Floor Plans. Within each subregion. and click OK. click Properties. click Subregion.

36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration.Grass. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. and apply the material Site . 34 On the Design Bar. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. under Floor Plans. 35 On the Design Bar.Grass. Notice that the schedule has been updated. under Floor Plans. Name each region Island . and apply the material Concrete . 32 In the Project Browser. click Lines. under Schedules/Quantities.31 In the Project Browser. double-click Site.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . Name the subregion Walkway. click Subregion. Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 . You must sketch each region separately.walkway. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. double-click Topography Schedule. double-click Site.

888 | Chapter 23 Site . 37 On the Design Bar. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. double-click Topography Schedule. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. there is still only one toposurface. Notice that the schedule has been updated. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. click Save As. 38 In the Project Browser. 39 On the File menu.

2 Select the toposurface. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. see the tutorial. double-click Site.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Grading the Toposurface | 889 . stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. under Floor Plans. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. When you use the grading tool. and click Save. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 5 On the Design Bar. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. click Modify.rvt. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. click . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 3 On the Options Bar. select Existing for Phase Created. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Phasing. “Using Phasing” on page 992. A warning dialog is displayed.

click Graded Region. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 890 | Chapter 23 Site . The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.6 On the Design Bar. and click Select and Edit. select Copy Internal Points. Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 8 Select the topographic surface. 7 In the Graded Region dialog.

click Model Graphics Style. and new. 13 Press DELETE. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.10 Press DELETE. demolished. and click Hidden Line. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 11 On the View Control Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 891 .

Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click . 892 | Chapter 23 Site . The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 17 On the Design Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click Point. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Model Graphics Style. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. click . and click Shading with Edges. click Finish Surface. 19 On the View Control Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 20 On the View toolbar. 18 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

under Phasing. When you add a building pad. click Save. you can delete it. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. click View Properties. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 23 Select the toposurface. Therefore. and click OK. click View Properties. Adding a Building Pad | 893 . Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. 26 On the File menu. this project file is required in its current state. specify Existing for Phase. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a building pad. specify New Construction for Phase. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. Site tutorial-in progress. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Only the graded topography displays. and delete it. only the original toposurface displays. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. under Phasing. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. and click OK. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the View menu.rvt. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface.

If you have an existing building model. click Lines. click Model Graphics Style. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Pad. the Pick Walls command is active.Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. NOTE By default. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. and click Hidden Line. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. 894 | Chapter 23 Site . 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Design Bar.

Adding Site Components In this exercise. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 7 On the View Control Bar. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. this project file is required in its current state. . . click 9 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 895 . click Finish Sketch. 8 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Notice the new 10 On the File menu. “Adding Site Components” on page 895. and click Shading with Edges. click building pad.6 On the Design Bar. click Save. click Model Graphics Style. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.

3 In the Type Selector. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Site tutorial-in progress. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . and select the parking space.90 deg. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Site.rvt. click Parking Component. click Modify. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 896 | Chapter 23 Site . under Floor Plans.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. . double-click Site. under Floor Plans.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click Site Component. click 9 On the View toolbar. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Adding Site Components | 897 . 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click parking spaces. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 8 On the View toolbar.

13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. choose any tree type.12 In the Type Selector. 14 On the View toolbar. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. 898 | Chapter 23 Site . click .

rvt. click Tag All Not Tagged. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the File menu. this project file is required in its current state. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Site. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. click Save. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 .15 On the View toolbar. “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. In the following illustration. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. under Floor Plans. click . Site tutorial-in progress. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

4 Under Available fields. and click Apply. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. click the Fields tab. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a parking schedule. 5 On the View menu. this project file is required in its current state. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. select Parking for Category. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. In the following exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. and click OK. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. and click OK. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. click Save. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900. click Apply. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. select Mark. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Hidden Line. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. 7 On the File menu. 900 | Chapter 23 Site . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. If necessary. and under Heading. 12 In the Site plan. enter Space.5 Under Available fields. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. enter Size. 11 On the Window menu. under Floor Plans. click Tile. 6 Click the Formatting tab. and click OK. under Space. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 13 In the Parking Schedule. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. number the first three spaces consecutively. under Space. 8 Under Fields. and under Heading. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 14 In the Parking Schedule. select Mark. under Views (all). 7 Under Fields. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. and click Add. click Close Hidden Windows. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. 9 On the Window menu. select Type. The parking schedule is displayed. select Type. click Save. double-click Site. 10 In the Project Browser. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . 15 On the File menu.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

Structural 24 In this tutorial. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton. In the final lesson. You begin by adding the structural walls. and beams to Level 1. After completing level 1. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. columns. 903 .

click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. under Views (all). 4 In the Import/Link dialog. go to the Project Browser. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. If necessary. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Metric\m_Wall_Import. click Training Files. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural .dwg. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click Level 2. under Import or Link. Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 2 On the File menu. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls.rvt. and open Metric\m_Structural. specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import). click Training Files.

you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. This file is used in the next exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial.■ ■ Select Current view only.rvt. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. In this exercise. Select All for Layers. click Save As. Structural_tutorial. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. you imported a DWG file. right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. select Invert colors. 6 Under Positioning. select Automatically place. 8 On the File menu. After you trace the walls. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 . 7 Click Open. to trace the initial set of structural walls. and select Origin to origin.

you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. In the steps that follow. 6 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 5 In the Type Selector. First. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain.200mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. select Basic Wall: Generic . 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. and click to specify the wall endpoint.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. specify the following: ■ Select Depth. rather than the height. Click . their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural . you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. In addition. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. click Structural Wall. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line.

click . and click to complete the chain of walls. 10 Move the curser to the right. click Modify to finish the sketch. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. and click the next line intersection. Sketching Structural Walls | 907 .9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. 13 On the View toolbar.

notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. expand Views (all).TIP If necessary. expand Floor Plans. click Structural Wall. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural . Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. On the Options Bar. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view. in the View toolbar. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. and double-click Level 2.

double-click Level 2. 23 Under Visibility. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 .dwg and click OK. click the Imported Categories tab. click Modify to end the wall chain.200mm. 19 On the View toolbar. Click to create a three-point arc. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Type Selector.18 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Floor Plans. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. select Basic Wall: Generic . click Structural Wall. 26 On the Options Bar. click . 21 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. clear m_Wall_Import. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view.

31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown.27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. 29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. 28 On the Options Bar. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. This is the left extent of the arc. 910 | Chapter 24 Structural . This is the right extent of the arc. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. click . Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall.

34 Select the horizontal wall. enter 1500. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. enter 1500. and press Enter. If it is not. click the value. Sketching Structural Walls | 911 . click Modify. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm.32 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER.

38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. Both walls are 1200 mm long.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. In the steps that follow. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural . Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below. clear Chain. you create the final structural walls for the project. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. 36 On the Design Bar.

You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. You then make minor modifications to their position. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. click Save. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. This project file is required. click Modify. Floor Plans. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls.39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. In this exercise. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser. in its current state. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. double-click Level 2. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 41 On the View toolbar. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. In the next exercise. Structural_tutorial. 40 On the Design Bar. under Views (all).rvt. click . 42 On the File menu. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.

Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. Select Entire Walls for Pick. click Modify. click Options to specify the wall pick options. and click to place the dimension as shown. and when it highlights. select it. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural . After you select Entire Walls. select Intersecting Walls. 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. and click OK. the Options button becomes available.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . 4 On the Options Bar. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. 6 Move the cursor to the left. click Dimension.

9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 .8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.

click Save. Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. This project file is required. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. several different beam types. In the next lesson. 12 On the Edit menu. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. 13 On the File menu. you add structural columns. in its current state. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. click Undo Edit Dimension Length. In this exercise.11 Click the temporary dimension value. joists. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. 916 | Chapter 24 Structural .

click Structural Column. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. In addition. double-click Level 1. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. 4 In the Type Selector. you use the grid intersection tool. If necessary. 5 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View menu. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. zoom in to place the column. and you add a column outside the grids.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. select Height and specify Level 2. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. TIP When adding the column. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. Adding Structural Columns | 917 . 6 Add a column to C1 as shown.

C3. and select grids 1-5. click Grid Intersection. 9 Use a crossing selection. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. and C5. 918 | Chapter 24 Structural .7 Add similar columns to C2. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. and A.

TIP To create the crossing selection. Columns A3-5 are shown below. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. 10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. Adding Structural Columns | 919 . 12 Press the SPACEBAR again.

you could not have rotated them independently of each other. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . 21 Select column A5 and delete it. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. click Grid Intersection. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. click Finish. zoom out until you can see all the grids. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. This completes this set of columns. 19 On the Options Bar. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5.14 If necessary. click Modify. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. click Finish. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. click Structural Column. 15 On the Options Bar. Columns B3-5 are shown below.

In this exercise. in its current state. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 . to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. click . This project file is required. “Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. In the next exercise. you add beams manually. As you use the beam tool. 25 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click Save. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. 26 On the File menu. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. you add structural beams to the building model.24 On the Design Bar. you used various methods to add structural columns. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. you learn how to work with these varied conditions.

Dataset This exercise requires the project file. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural . 4 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline. click Beam. Structural_tutorial. 2 On the View menu. click Modify. double-click Level 2. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion.

11 On the Options Bar. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. click Grid. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. Use the following table for other conditions. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. select Girder for Usage. if a beam is joined column-to-column. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. 14 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. For example.7. When you use the grid tool to place beams. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 . and then move the cursor up to grid A. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Selector.9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. click Beam.

22 In the Type Selector. press and hold CTRL.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. click Grid. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. click Beam. and press ENTER. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural . 24 Select grid 3. enter 8200. click Finish. click Modify. click the temporary dimension value. 17 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. and select grid C. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4.

In addition. click Finish. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain.Notice beams are added between columns. Press ESC to end the chain. Click column B5 to add the first beam. and for Usage. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 . notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. select Girder. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. select Chain.

SI. You can also use the shortcut key. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. 30 On the Options Bar. connecting the column at B4. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4.28 On the Options Bar. 926 | Chapter 24 Structural . Press ESC to end the chain. select Girder for Usage. select Girder for Usage. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. Press ESC to end the chain. to snap only to intersections.

Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 33 Select grid A. The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. 36 On the Options Bar. click Grid. click Grid.7 beam had crossed grid A. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 .7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. If the W310x32. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. 34 On the Options Bar.

44 On the Options Bar. 43 In the Type Selector. 39 On the View toolbar. Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. 928 | Chapter 24 Structural . select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. under Floor Plans.37 Select grid B. click Finish. 45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 38 On the Options Bar. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5. click . select Girder for Usage. In the steps that follow. double-click Level 2. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. click Beam.

click Modify. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. 48 On the View toolbar. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). 47 On the Design Bar. click . Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 .46 Move the cursor to the right.

double-click Level 2. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. select Girder.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. In the steps that follow. 52 In the Type Selector. and select Chain. and click when it intersects grid 2. under Floor Plans. click Beam. 53 On the Options Bar. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. for Usage.

Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 . Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. click . and click when it intersects grid 1. 57 On the View toolbar.

You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. Structural_tutorial. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser.58 On the File menu.B3 quadrants. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. you add joists and purlins to the building model. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. click Save. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add joists and purlins to the building model.7. In the next exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. In this exercise. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural . This project file is required. 5 On the Options Bar. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. select Automatic. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. 2 Zoom around the A1 . Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. in its current state. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. double-click Level 2. You then create a joist array. For example. for Usage. “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932. click Beam. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams.

7 On the Design Bar. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. click Modify. 8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist. Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 . According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected. under Structural. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. on the Edit menu. 9 With the beam selected. click Array. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click on the Options Bar. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. 11 Click OK. you selected the Automatic option. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary.

934 | Chapter 24 Structural . Select 2nd for Move to. specify the following: Click . 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 14 for Number. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. Once the direction is set. enter 1250 and press ENTER. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A.13 On the Options Bar.

click Beam.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 . 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. 17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown.

23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural .Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. style. and click. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. Enter 7 for Number. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value. click Array. joists. specify the following: Click . 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Edit menu. and color within the Object Styles dialog. Select 2nd for Move to. and purlins.

and click OK. under Other. click . 26 In the Filter dialog. Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 . 25 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist). change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view.The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. click . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2.

“Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938. This project file is required. click . you create new levels. Click OK. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. 31 On the File menu. and notice the connection symbols display. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. click Save. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. In this exercise. 30 On the View toolbar. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. 938 | Chapter 24 Structural . in its current state. 29 On the Design Bar. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. click Modify.■ ■ Select Moment Connection First. In the next lesson.

Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select grid 1. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. under Elevations. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Defining New Levels In this exercise. Defining New Levels | 939 .rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you create several new levels. select Make Plan View. Structural_tutorial. You need at least 3 meters of space. Click to add Level 3. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. click Level. double-click Building Elevation.

click Save. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. you created three new levels. 940 | Chapter 24 Structural . These levels that are required in the next exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Each level is 3000 mm high. 8 On the File menu. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. in its current state. In this exercise. This project file is required. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed.In the Project Browser.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Structural_tutorial. “Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940. click . Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar.

click Copy to Clipboard. “Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942. This project file is required. In the next lesson. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. click OK. and select Levels 4 and 5. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. 8 On the File menu. double-click Building Elevation. click Save. Make sure the entire building model is included. under Elevations. press and hold CTRL. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Select Levels dialog. 5 In the Select Levels dialog. in its current state. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select Level 3. 3 On the Edit menu. In this exercise. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu.

6 On the Design Bar. you create a framing elevation. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. 942 | Chapter 24 Structural . Structural_tutorial. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. You can now view the new elevation. 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. and click.Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. click Modify. in the Project Browser.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. 5 Place the cursor over grid C. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. Elevation 1-a. under Floor Plans. click Framing Elevation. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3.

In this exercise. you add structural braces to the building model. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943. This project file is required. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. 8 On the File menu. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. You are ready to add the structural braces. Adding Structural Braces | 943 . In the next exercise. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. Structural_tutorial. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. in its current state.7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. click Save. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. Notice the stick framing representation.

Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown. When adding the braces. you use point-to-point insertion. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural .4. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. select the view crop box. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and using the shape grips. click Brace. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. 3 In the Type Selector. selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown.

Adding Structural Braces | 945 . 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. The second brace is displayed. 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4.The brace displays.

13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. 946 | Chapter 24 Structural . 11 On the Options Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Array. specify the following: Click . The braces are arrayed to Level 1. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. 10 On the Edit menu. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Enter 4 for Number. click Modify.Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar.

17 On the File menu. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. click . select Structural Framing Tags. Adding Structural Braces | 947 . In this exercise. and click OK. click Save. 16 On the View toolbar.15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

and so on. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. floors. 949 . All other team members can view this workset. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. Using Worksharing. they cannot make changes to it.Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. A workset is a collection of building elements. In this tutorial. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. stairs. called Worksharing. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. doors. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. such as walls. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. however. You can enable Worksharing for any project.

you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. and click Editable. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you specify an active workset. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. After the project is shared. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. go to the Worksets dialog. such as annotations and dimensions. To make a workset editable. use Element Borrowing. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. you can select which worksets are open or closed. When you are working on a shared project. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. In the next exercise. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you must first enable Worksharing. select the desired workset. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Elements specific to a view. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. After learning the fundamentals. When setting up Worksharing. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson.

Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. and View worksets. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. with each assigned a specific functional task. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Shared Levels and Grids. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Regardless of the default setting. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Team member roles Typically. Experience has shown that.The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Instead. You should have at least one workset for each person. not including the Project Standards. for a typical project. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. In most projects. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. When creating the new worksets. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. designers work in teams. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 . By subdividing the project based on these task roles. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. In a multi-story structure. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. such as a tenant interior. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. When you create a new workset. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. On this tab. As new members create worksets for their own use. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use.

However. you make that workset editable by you. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. if a workset named Interior was created. After saving to the central file. When you save locally (to your local file). within the local file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. When you save to the central file. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. proceeds as usual. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. This is called “Selective Open. For example. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. your changes propagate to the entire team. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. This makes them available to other team members. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. your changes are saved. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. On the Options Bar. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. the file is saved as the central file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. When finished or at regular intervals. however. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Generally. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. Therefore. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. When you save to the central file. you can select which workset is active. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you should then save to your local file. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. As you work.

If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. In the next exercise. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. When working remotely. for instance. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. if you know who checked out the required workset. reload the latest changes from the central file. save to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. using VPN. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. In this instance. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. and open Common\c_Worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In this situation. To do this. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. Alternatively. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. click Training Files. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. and make that workset editable. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 .rvt. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you work no differently then you would in the office. and then save the local file. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you enable Worksharing within an existing project." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this conceptual exercise. make any required worksets editable. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. a third team member is assigned furniture placement.Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. In this simple training project. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . and Views. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Your username displays as the present owner. In this case. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. under Show. For example. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. another is assigned the interior layout. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. The Worksets dialog is displayed. For training purposes. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. click Worksets. Project Standards. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Therefore. imagine four users including yourself. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. clear Families. ■ 6 Under Show. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. When you enable worksharing. and notice all are editable by you. Only User-Created worksets should display. 4 In the Worksets dialog. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets.

8 Enter the name Interior Layout. 21 Select one of the interior walls. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. expand Floor Plans. In this training file. you can rename the default workset. 15 In the Worksets dialog. and double-click Level 1. 20 Click OK. stairs. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. currently named Workset1. however. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. When you initially activate Worksharing. click . select Workset1. under Identity Data. expand Views (all). and walls. click OK. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. and click OK. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. clear Visible by default in all views. 24 Select all of the interior elements. it is better to make them visible by default. 9 Click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. type the name Exterior Shell. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. You do. 17 In the drawing area. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 18 On the Options Bar. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. click New. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. select Interior Layout for Workset. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 10 Click New. 13 Click Rename. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. including the interior doors. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. 14 In the Rename dialog. click . and click OK.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. under Identity Data. 12 In the Worksets dialog. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser.

click the Worksets tab. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Identity Data. click Visibility/Graphics. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click the Worksets tab. If any interior elements remain. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 27 On the View menu. 31 On the View menu. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click . This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 30 Click OK. 25 On the Options Bar.

In this exercise. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 35 In the drawing area. you create your local file. and click OK. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 3 Click Open. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. click Close. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Open. check out worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click Non Editable. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 43 On the right side of the dialog. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. Now that you have created the central file. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. and click OK. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. If you have not yet completed the exercise. click Save As. 2 In the Open dialog. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Worksets dialog. under Views (all).33 Select Interior Layout. 44 Click OK. click . you enabled Worksharing on a project. Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . please do so before continuing. select Specify. double-click Level 2. click Worksets. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 36 On the Options Bar. select all of the interior elements of the building model. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. make modifications to the building model. make sure you remember the location of this central file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 39 In the Save As dialog. 40 Click Save. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. In addition. 34 In the Project Browser. 45 On the File menu. select the central file and. under Identity Data. under Open Worksets. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. select Interior Layout for Workset.

verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 958 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. click Worksets. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. click . Verify that it is cleared. select Interior Layout for Name. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. select Interior Layout. and click OK. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. On the Options Bar. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 17 On the Options Bar. select all the User-Created worksets. Before working on the model. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. Next. 11 Click OK.4 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 7 In the File Save Options dialog. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and click OK. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. notice the Editable Only option. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 5 On the File menu. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 6 In the Save As dialog. click Modify. expand Views (all). 14 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. and click Save. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. and select Yes for Editable. 12 On the Window menu. click Save As. expand Floor Plans. In this case. click Options. If this is selected. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 10 In the Worksets dialog.

click . you can still edit this wall. The precise location is not important. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 25 Delete the door. 21 Click OK. 20 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior . In the Worksets dialog. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. and click OK. under Identity Data. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes.18 In the Element Properties dialog. If it was owned by another user. 19 Under Constraints. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. however. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 22 On the File menu. Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Wall. 23 Click OK. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. In this case. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. Working Individually with Worksets | 959 . 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. click Worksets. 28 In the Type Selector. Because this element is not owned by another user. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset.126mm Partition (2-hr). a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable.

31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. save to central. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. At the end of a work session. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. 34 Using the following illustration as a guide. add two door openings into the rooms you created.30 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The Save to Central dialog is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. select: ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets 960 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . which matches the information in the Status Bar. and save locally immediately afterward. displays the workset as well as the element type. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. 33 In the Type Selector. Borrowed Elements is selected. By default. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. In addition. When working in your local file. you should perform regular saves. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 36 In the Save to Central dialog. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. click Save to Central. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. In this particular case. you should relinquish all worksets. click Modify. a tooltip. it is recommended. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. click Door. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Whenever you save.

make elements editable. under Username. under Open Worksets. click Open. two users access the central file through a network connection. select the central file and. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. Throughout the process. enter User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. click Options. In the following section of this exercise. consider that person to be User 1. return to the Settings dialog. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. and reset the Username to your computer login name. leave this file open in its current state. please do so before continuing. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. specifically sequenced. and reload the latest changes. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. In addition. This is a system setting. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. You modified the building model. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and click OK.■ Save the local file after “Save to Central” 37 Click OK. For training purposes. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. each user must check out worksets. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. and proceed to Creating a local copy. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. checked out worksets. 8 Click Open. User 2: Create a local file. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 961 . Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. and click OK. you created your local file. In this exercise. select Specify. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 4 Click the General Tab and. skip the following section. For training purposes. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. If you have not yet completed these exercises.rvt. select all the User-Created worksets. 7 In the Open dialog. 3 On the Settings menu. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. one user has already created a local file. instructions are staggered.

If you only have one workset checked out. click Worksets. and click Save. You now have a local copy of the project. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. expand Floor Plans. 27 In the Save to Central dialog.” 28 Click OK. open it now. click Save to Central. 18 On the File menu. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated.10 On the File menu. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. expand Views (all). name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 26 On the File menu. click Worksets. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. 23 In the Project Browser. 22 Click OK. 14 On the File menu. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 962 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . User 1: Check out worksets. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. You are now the owner of that workset. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 11 In the Save As dialog. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. and double-click Level 1. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. and select Yes for Editable. This file is for your use only. click Save As. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. and double-click Level 1. it becomes the active workset. and select Yes for Editable. click Options. 16 Click OK. and click OK. If it is not open. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. modify the building model.

you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. right-click Level 1.” 34 Click OK. under Views (all). The changes User 2 made are apparent. under Floor Plans. click Save to Central. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 33 In the Save to Central dialog. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 36 On the File menu. click Save to Central. select the lower exterior wall. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 963 . and click Rename. and click OK. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. click Reload Latest. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.” 38 Click OK. User 1: Reload latest worksets. However. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset.30 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Worksets. Before adding any furniture. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. click Component. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 32 On the File menu. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 43 On the Project Browser. Click Yes. 44 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. select Yes for Editable. 42 On the Project Browser. 45 On the Project Browser. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. you should create a furniture plan view. and click Duplicate. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 40 On the File menu. 41 Select Furniture Layout. When you save to central. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. under Floor Plans. and click OK.

49 On the View menu. click Rename. such as Wall Types. select Project Standards. 964 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 60 Click OK 3 times. enter Exterior Wall . click Edit/New. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 57 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 65 On the File menu. rather than Families. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” 67 Click OK. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click the Worksets tab.” 54 Click OK. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 48 On the Design Bar. 62 In the Worksets dialog. click Modify. 64 Click OK. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. and click OK. Therefore. and click Properties. 59 In the Rename dialog. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 61 On the File menu.200mm. the Visible by default option was not selected. 66 In the Save to Central dialog. NOTE System families. click Save to Central. choose any desk. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu.47 In the Type Selector. 53 In the Save to Central dialog. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. and click inside any room. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Save to Central. click Worksets. under Show. leave this file open in its current state. click Reload Latest. 58 In the Type Properties dialog. are placed under Project Standards. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 52 On the File menu.

Each user must have network access to the central file.User 1: Reload latest. 70 In the Save to Central dialog. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. As each of you work. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. 3 In the Save As dialog. finished the previous workset exercises. “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users” on page 965. click Save As. 69 On the File menu. Each user checked out worksets. click Options. you need to set up your central and local files. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. select the following. and click OK. and published their changes back to the central file. and these problems are rectified. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. 4 In the File Save Options dialog. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. click Training Files. and click OK. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. select Save to Central. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. In subsequent steps. This exercise requires two users and. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Reload Latest. modified the building model. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. leave this file open in its current state. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 965 . and save 68 On the File menu. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. There are specific instructions for each user. select Make this a Central File after save. throughout this training. At the appropriate point in this exercise. In the final exercise of this tutorial. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. 5 Click Save. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” In this exercise. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial.rvt. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Checking out worksets. you save the dataset as a central file. and still have your local files open. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central.

verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Afterwards. Next. if any User-Created worksets are not open. and click Save. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click Save As. 13 On the File menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 15 Click Open. This is the local file for User 1. and click OK. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and click OK. and click Open. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 966 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . In addition. click Options. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select Specify. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Options. 10 In the File Save Options dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Click the General tab of the Options dialog.User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. 14 In the Open dialog. return to the Settings dialog. click Options. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. click Open. and click Save. 9 In the Save As dialog. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. click Worksets. 17 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select the central file and under Open Worksets. This is a system setting. The central file should still be open. 7 On the File menu. click Save As. 18 In the Save As dialog. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. On the Settings menu. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 23 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. select them. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. Set the Username to User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file.

Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. and then click OK. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. 25 Under Active Workset. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 27 In the Worksets dialog. and click Editing Requests. under Floor Plans. and select Yes for Editable.24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 30 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. You are now the owner of that workset. click Worksets. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. At this point. click the File menu. select the second window from the top. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. and select Yes for Editable. select Exterior Shell. After you submit the request. double-click Level 1. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 28 Under Active Workset. and then click OK. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 31 On the left exterior wall. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 967 . select the Interior Layout workset. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. You are now the owner of that workset. Y